Avaya W310 WLAN Gateway Command Reference

Avaya W310 WLAN Gateway Command Reference

Avaya W310 WLAN Gateway

Command Reference Guide

Document No. 21-30004

0

Issue 1

March 31, 2004

Copyright 2004, Avaya Inc.

All Rights Reserved

Notice

Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing. However, information is subject to change.

Warranty

Avaya Inc. provides a limited warranty on this product. Refer to your sales agreement to establish the terms of the limited warranty. In addition, Avaya’s standard warranty language as well as information regarding support for this product, while under warranty, is available through the following Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support .

How to Get Help

For additional support telephone numbers, go to the Avaya support

Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support . If you are:

• Within the United States, click the Escalation Management link.

Then click the appropriate link for the type of support you need.

• Outside the United States, click the Escalation Management link.

Then click the International Services link that includes telephone numbers for the international Centers of Excellence.

Providing Telecommunications Security

Telecommunications security (of voice, data, and/or video communications) is the prevention of any type of intrusion to (that is, either unauthorized or malicious access to or use of) your company's telecommunications equipment by some party.

Your company's “telecommunications equipment” includes both this

Avaya product and any other voice/data/video equipment that could be accessed via this Avaya product (that is, “networked equipment”).

An “outside party” is anyone who is not a corporate employee, agent, subcontractor, or is not working on your company's behalf. Whereas, a

“malicious party” is anyone (including someone who may be otherwise authorized) who accesses your telecommunications equipment with either malicious or mischievous intent.

Such intrusions may be either to/through synchronous (timemultiplexed and/or circuit-based) or asynchronous (character-, message-, or packet-based) equipment or interfaces for reasons of:

• Utilization (of capabilities special to the accessed equipment)

• Theft (such as, of intellectual property, financial assets, or toll facility access)

• Eavesdropping (privacy invasions to humans)

• Mischief (troubling, but apparently innocuous, tampering)

• Harm (such as harmful tampering, data loss or alteration, regardless of motive or intent)

Be aware that there may be a risk of unauthorized intrusions associated with your system and/or its networked equipment. Also realize that, if such an intrusion should occur, it could result in a variety of losses to your company (including but not limited to, human/data privacy, intellectual property, material assets, financial resources, labor costs, and/or legal costs).

Responsibility for Your Company’s Telecommunications Security

The final responsibility for securing both this system and its networked equipment rests with you - Avaya’s customer system administrator, your telecommunications peers, and your managers.

Base the fulfillment of your responsibility on acquired knowledge and resources from a variety of sources including but not limited to:

• Installation documents

• System administration documents

• Security documents

• Hardware-/software-based security tools

• Shared information between you and your peers

• Telecommunications security experts

To prevent intrusions to your telecommunications equipment, you and your peers should carefully program and configure:

• Your Avaya-provided telecommunications systems and their interfaces

• Your Avaya-provided software applications, as well as their underlying hardware/software platforms and interfaces

• Any other equipment networked to your Avaya products

TCP/IP Facilities

Customers may experience differences in product performance, reliability and security depending upon network configurations/design and topologies, even when the product performs as warranted.

Standards Compliance

Avaya Inc. is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modifications of this equipment or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by Avaya Inc. The correction of interference caused by such unauthorized modifications, substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user. Pursuant to Part 15 of the Federal

Communications Commission (FCC) Rules, the user is cautioned that changes or modifications not expressly approved by Avaya Inc. could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment.

Product Safety Standards

This product complies with and conforms to the following international Product Safety standards as applicable:

Safety of Information Technology Equipment, IEC 60950, 3rd Edition including all relevant national deviations as listed in Compliance with

IEC for Electrical Equipment (IECEE) CB-96A.

Safety of Information Technology Equipment, CAN/CSA-C22.2

No. 60950-00 / UL 60950, 3rd Edition

Safety Requirements for Customer Equipment, ACA Technical

Standard (TS) 001 - 1997

One or more of the following Mexican national standards, as applicable: NOM 001 SCFI 1993, NOM SCFI 016 1993, NOM 019

SCFI 1998

The equipment described in this document may contain Class 1

LASER Device(s). These devices comply with the following standards:

• EN 60825-1, Edition 1.1, 1998-01

• 21 CFR 1040.10 and CFR 1040.11.

The LASER devices operate within the following parameters:

• Maximum power output: -5 dBm to -8 dBm

• Center Wavelength: 1310 nm to 1360 nm

Luokan 1 Laserlaite

Klass 1 Laser Apparat

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposures. Contact your Avaya representative for more laser product information.

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Standards

This product complies with and conforms to the following international EMC standards and all relevant national deviations:

Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference of

Information Technology Equipment, CISPR 22:1997 and

EN55022:1998.

Information Technology Equipment – Immunity Characteristics –

Limits and Methods of Measurement, CISPR 24:1997 and

EN55024:1998, including:

• Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2

• Radiated Immunity IEC 61000-4-3

• Electrical Fast Transient IEC 61000-4-4

• Lightning Effects IEC 61000-4-5

• Conducted Immunity IEC 61000-4-6

• Mains Frequency Magnetic Field IEC 61000-4-8

• Voltage Dips and Variations IEC 61000-4-11

• Powerline Harmonics IEC 61000-3-2

• Voltage Fluctuations and Flicker IEC 61000-3-3

Federal Communications Commission Statement

Part 15:

Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

Canadian Department of Communications (DOC) Interference

Information

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme

NMB-003 du Canada.

This equipment meets the applicable Industry Canada Terminal

Equipment Technical Specifications. This is confirmed by the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a

Declaration of Conformity indicating that Industry Canada technical specifications were met. It does not imply that Industry Canada approved the equipment.

Declarations of Conformity

United States FCC Part 68 Supplier’s Declaration of Conformity

(SDoC)

Avaya Inc. in the United States of America hereby certifies that the equipment described in this document and bearing a TIA TSB-168 label identification number complies with the FCC’s Rules and

Regulations 47 CFR Part 68, and the Administrative Council on

Terminal Attachments (ACTA) adopted technical criteria.

Avaya further asserts that Avaya handset-equipped terminal equipment described in this document complies with Paragraph

68.316 of the FCC Rules and Regulations defining Hearing Aid

Compatibility and is deemed compatible with hearing aids.

Copies of SDoCs signed by the Responsible Party in the U. S. can be obtained by contacting your local sales representative and are available on the following Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support .

All Avaya media servers and media gateways are compliant with FCC

Part 68, but many have been registered with the FCC before the SDoC process was available. A list of all Avaya registered products may be found at: http://www.part68.org by conducting a search using “Avaya” as manufacturer.

European Union Declarations of Conformity

To order copies of this and other documents:

Call: Avaya Publications Center

Voice 1.800.457.1235 or 1.207.866.6701

FAX 1.800.457.1764 or 1.207.626.7269

Write: Globalware Solutions

200 Ward Hill Avenue

Haverhill, MA 01835 USA

Attention: Avaya Account Management

E-mail: [email protected]

For the most current versions of documentation, go to the Avaya support Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support .

Avaya Inc. declares that the equipment specified in this document bearing the “CE” (Conformité Europeénne) mark conforms to the

European Union Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment

Directive (1999/5/EC), including the Electromagnetic Compatibility

Directive (89/336/EEC) and Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC). This equipment has been certified to meet CTR3 Basic Rate Interface (BRI) and CTR4 Primary Rate Interface (PRI) and subsets thereof in CTR12 and CTR13, as applicable.

Copies of these Declarations of Conformity (DoCs) can be obtained by contacting your local sales representative and are available on the following Web site: http://www.avaya.com/support .

Japan

This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary

Control Council for Interference by Information Technology

Equipment (VCCI). If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio disturbance may occur, in which case, the user may be required to take corrective actions.

Contents

Chapter 1: Using the CLI............................................................................. 1

Overview .................................................................................................................. 1

Chapter Contents...................................................................................................... 1

Conventions Used .................................................................................................... 2

CLI Help .................................................................................................................. 2

Command Line Prompt ............................................................................................ 2

Navigation, Cursor Movement and Shortcuts.......................................................... 3

Command Modes ..................................................................................................... 3

Command Syntax ..................................................................................................... 6

Command Abbreviations ................................................................................ 6

Universal Commands ............................................................................................... 6

Top and Up commands ................................................................................... 6

Retstatus command ......................................................................................... 6

Tree command ................................................................................................. 6

Security Levels......................................................................................................... 7

Entering the Supervisor Level ......................................................................... 7

Entering the CLI .............................................................................................. 8

Entering the Technician Level ........................................................................ 8

Chapter 2: AP Group Commands ................................................................ 9 add-ports .......................................................................................................... 9

delete-ports .................................................................................................... 10

interface AP-Group ....................................................................................... 11

show AP-Group ............................................................................................. 12

Chapter 3: Configuration File Commands................................................. 13

copy mobility-running tftp ............................................................................ 14 copy mobility-startup tftp .............................................................................. 14

copy module-config tftp ................................................................................ 16

copy running-config tftp ............................................................................... 17

copy stack-config tftp .................................................................................... 18

copy startup-config tftp ................................................................................. 19

copy tftp EW_Archive .................................................................................. 20

copy tftp LAP_image .................................................................................... 21

copy tftp mobility-startup .............................................................................. 22

copy tftp module-config ................................................................................ 23

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide i

Contents

copy tftp policy-startup ..................................................................................24

copy tftp stack-config ....................................................................................25

copy tftp startup-config .................................................................................26

copy tftp SW_image ......................................................................................27

copy tftp SW_powerinline_image .................................................................29

copy tftp wireless-gateway-startup ................................................................30

copy wireless-gateway-running tftp ..............................................................31

copy wireless-gateway-startup tftp ................................................................33

erase startup-config .......................................................................................33

show copy status ............................................................................................34

show erase status ...........................................................................................34

show running-config ......................................................................................35

show upload status .........................................................................................36

Chapter 4: Connection Management Commands ...................................... 37

set allowed managers .....................................................................................38

set allowed managers ip .................................................................................39

set inband vlan ...............................................................................................40

set interface inband ........................................................................................40

set interface ppp .............................................................................................41

set interface ppp {enable | enable-always | disable | off | reset} ....................42

set ppp authentication incoming ....................................................................43

set ppp baud-rate ............................................................................................43

set ppp chap-secret ........................................................................................44

set ppp incoming timeout ..............................................................................45

show allowed managers status .......................................................................46

show allowed managers table ........................................................................46

ip http enable .................................................................................................47

ip telnet enable ...............................................................................................48

ip telnet-client ................................................................................................49

ping ................................................................................................................50

show ppp authentication ................................................................................51

show ppp baud-rate ........................................................................................51

show ppp configuration .................................................................................52

show ppp incoming timeout ..........................................................................52

show ppp session ...........................................................................................53

show secure current .......................................................................................53

telnet ..............................................................................................................54

ii

Chapter 5: Intelligent Multicast Commands.............................................. 55 set intelligent-multicast .................................................................................55

set intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning time ..........................................56

set intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time .......................................57

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Contents

set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time ......................................... 58

show intelligent-multicast ............................................................................. 59

show intelligent-multicast hardware-support ................................................ 60

Chapter 6: IP Commands........................................................................... 61 clear ip route .................................................................................................. 61

ip icmp redirect ............................................................................................. 62 set ip route ..................................................................................................... 62

show interface ............................................................................................... 63

show ip route ................................................................................................. 64

Chapter 7: Layer 2 Switching Commands................................................. 67

clear cam ....................................................................................................... 68 clear vlan ....................................................................................................... 68

mac-address-authorized-list .......................................................................... 69

mac-address-authorized-list-default .............................................................. 70

set arp-aging-interval .................................................................................... 71

set arp-tx-interval .......................................................................................... 72 set mac-aging ................................................................................................ 72

set mac-aging-time ........................................................................................ 73

set vlan .......................................................................................................... 74

show arp-aging-interval ................................................................................ 75 show arp-tx-interval ...................................................................................... 75

show cam ....................................................................................................... 76

show l2-module-config ................................................................................. 77

show l2-stack-config ..................................................................................... 81

show mac address authorized list .................................................................. 82

show mac-aging ............................................................................................ 83

show mac-aging-time .................................................................................... 84

show vlan ..................................................................................................... 84

Chapter 8: LAP and Radio Card Commands............................................. 87

apply-template ............................................................................................... 88

assoc-response-timeout ................................................................................. 89

automatic-channel-selection-band ................................................................. 90

beacon-period ................................................................................................ 91

change-lap-name ........................................................................................... 92

channel-frequency ......................................................................................... 93

channel-selection ........................................................................................... 97

clear statistics ................................................................................................ 98

copy tftp LAP_image .................................................................................. 100 disable-lap ................................................................................................... 100

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide iii

Contents

dtim-period ..................................................................................................101

fragmentation-threshold ..............................................................................102

lap ................................................................................................................104

lap-base-ip-address ......................................................................................105

lap-location ..................................................................................................106

lap-template .................................................................................................106

lb-adj-ap-time-difference .............................................................................107

lb-mode ........................................................................................................108

lb-tx-time .....................................................................................................109

long-retry-limit ............................................................................................110

max-rx-lifetime ............................................................................................112

max-tx-msdu-lifetime ..................................................................................113

multicast-tx-rate ...........................................................................................114

operational-mode .........................................................................................116

power-up-lap ................................................................................................117

radio-card-802.11 ........................................................................................119

radio-card-template ......................................................................................120

reboot-lap .....................................................................................................121

restore-lap-to-template ................................................................................122

restore-to-factory-default .............................................................................123

rogue-ap .......................................................................................................124

rogue-ap-authorized-mac-list ......................................................................125

rogue-ap-interval .........................................................................................126

rts-threshold .................................................................................................128

set LAP boot bank .......................................................................................129

short-retry-limit ...........................................................................................130

short-slot-time-implemented .......................................................................131

short-slot-time-status ...................................................................................132

show lap parameters ....................................................................................133

show rogue ap authorized mac list ..............................................................135

show template parameters ...........................................................................135

spectralink-compatible-phone .....................................................................137

ssid ...............................................................................................................138

tx-power-level ..............................................................................................139

unicast-tx-rate ..............................................................................................140

Chapter 9: Logging and RMON Commands ........................................... 145

clear log .......................................................................................................146

clear logging file ..........................................................................................147

clear logging server .....................................................................................147

clear rmon statistics .....................................................................................148

clear utilization cpu .....................................................................................148

rmon alarm ...................................................................................................150

rmon event ...................................................................................................151

iv Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Contents

rmon history ................................................................................................ 152

set logging file condition ............................................................................. 154

set logging file ............................................................................................. 156

set logging server ........................................................................................ 157

set logging server access-level .................................................................... 158

set logging server condition ........................................................................ 159

set logging server disable ............................................................................ 161 set logging server enable ............................................................................. 161

set logging server facility ............................................................................ 162

set logging session condition ...................................................................... 163

set logging session disable .......................................................................... 165 set logging session enable ........................................................................... 165

set utilization cpu ........................................................................................ 166

show dev log file ......................................................................................... 167 show log ...................................................................................................... 167

show logging file condition ......................................................................... 168

show logging file content ............................................................................ 169

show logging server condition .................................................................... 171 show logging session condition .................................................................. 171

show rmon alarm ......................................................................................... 172

show rmon event ......................................................................................... 173

show rmon history ....................................................................................... 174

show rmon statistics .................................................................................... 175

show utilization ........................................................................................... 176

Chapter 10: Policy Commands ................................................................ 179

Overview .............................................................................................................. 179

Ingress and Egress Policy ............................................................................ 179

Chapter Contents ......................................................................................... 180

W310 Policy Commands ..................................................................................... 180

clear-policy-statistics ................................................................................... 181

composite-operation .................................................................................... 182

cookie .......................................................................................................... 185

cos ............................................................................................................... 186

destination-ip ............................................................................................... 187

destination-user-group ................................................................................. 188

dscp ............................................................................................................. 189

dscp-table .................................................................................................... 190 ether-type ..................................................................................................... 190

ether-type-rule ............................................................................................. 191

ether-type simulate ...................................................................................... 192

icmp ............................................................................................................. 193

ip access-control-list .................................................................................... 196

ip access-group ............................................................................................ 197

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide v

Contents

ip-fragments-in ............................................................................................197

ip-option-in ..................................................................................................198

ip policy-list-copy ........................................................................................199

ip-protocol ...................................................................................................199

ip qos-group .................................................................................................201

ip qos-list .....................................................................................................202

ip-rule ..........................................................................................................203

ip simulate ...................................................................................................204

name ............................................................................................................206

owner ...........................................................................................................207

pre-classification ..........................................................................................208

show dscp-table ...........................................................................................209

show ether-type-rule ....................................................................................210

show ip access-control-list ..........................................................................211

show ip active-policy-lists ...........................................................................212

show ip qos-list ............................................................................................214

show ip-rule .................................................................................................215

show list .......................................................................................................216

show-policy-statistics ..................................................................................217

source-ip ......................................................................................................219

source-user-group ........................................................................................220

tcp destination-port ......................................................................................221

tcp-established .............................................................................................223

tcp source-port .............................................................................................224

traffic-type ...................................................................................................226

udp destination-port .....................................................................................227

udp source-port ............................................................................................230

Setting Policy: Example 1 .................................................................................... 232

Network Setup: ............................................................................................232

How To Configure .......................................................................................233

Setting Policy: Example 2 .................................................................................... 235

Network Setup: ............................................................................................235

How To Configure: ......................................................................................235

Setting Policy: Example 3 .................................................................................... 238

Network Setup: ............................................................................................238

How To Configure: ......................................................................................238

Setting Policy: Example 4 .................................................................................... 241

Configuring a QoS Policy for Incoming Traffic: ........................................241

Configuring a QoS Policy for Outgoing Traffic ..........................................243

Setting Policy: Example 5 .................................................................................... 246

Chapter 11: W310 Port Commands ......................................................... 249

clear port mirror ...........................................................................................250

clear port static-vlan ....................................................................................251

vi Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Contents

set intermodule port redundancy ................................................................. 251

set port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-advertisement .................................. 253

set port channel ........................................................................................... 254

set port classification ................................................................................... 255

set port disable ............................................................................................. 256

set port dot1x initialize ................................................................................ 257

set port dot1x max-req ................................................................................ 258

set port dot1x port-control ........................................................................... 259

set port dot1x quiet-period .......................................................................... 260

set port dot1x re-authenticate ...................................................................... 261

set port dot1x re-authentication ................................................................... 262

set port dot1x re-authperiod ........................................................................ 263

set port dot1x server-timeout ...................................................................... 264

set port dot1x supp-timeout ......................................................................... 265

set port dot1x tx-period ............................................................................... 266

set port duplex ............................................................................................. 267

set port edge admin state ............................................................................. 268

set port enable ............................................................................................. 269

set port flowcontrol ..................................................................................... 270

set port level ................................................................................................ 272

set port mirror .............................................................................................. 273

set port name ............................................................................................... 274

set port negotiation ...................................................................................... 275

set port point-to-point admin status ............................................................. 276

set port powerinline ..................................................................................... 277

set port powerinline priority ........................................................................ 278

set port redundancy {enable | disable} ........................................................ 279 set port redundancy ..................................................................................... 279

set port redundancy-intervals ...................................................................... 281

set port spantree cost ................................................................................... 282

set port spantree disable .............................................................................. 283

set port spantree enable ............................................................................... 284 set port spantree force-protocol-migration .................................................. 284

set port spantree priority .............................................................................. 285

set port speed ............................................................................................... 286

set port static-vlan ....................................................................................... 287

set port trap .................................................................................................. 288

set port vlan ................................................................................................. 289

set port vlan-binding-mode ......................................................................... 290

set trunk ....................................................................................................... 291

show intermodule port redundancy ............................................................. 292 show port ..................................................................................................... 292

show port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-advertisement .............................. 294

show port channel ....................................................................................... 295

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide vii

Contents

show port classification ...............................................................................296

show port dot1x ...........................................................................................297

show port dot1x statistics ............................................................................300

show port edge state ....................................................................................301

show port flowcontrol ..................................................................................302

show port mirror ..........................................................................................304

show port point-to-point status ....................................................................305

show port redundancy ..................................................................................306

show port trap ..............................................................................................307

show port vlan-binding-mode ......................................................................308

show trunk ...................................................................................................309

Chapter 12: Wireless Authentication and Security Commands .............. 311

clear dot1x config ........................................................................................312

dynamic-rekeying-interval ..........................................................................312

inter-wireless-gateways-secret ....................................................................313

security-mode ..............................................................................................314

set dot1x max-req ........................................................................................315

set dot1x quiet-period ..................................................................................315

set dot1x re-authperiod ................................................................................316

set dot1x server-timeout ..............................................................................317

set dot1x supp-timeout ................................................................................317

set dot1x system-auth-control disable .........................................................318

set dot1x system-auth-control enable ..........................................................318

set dot1x tx-period .......................................................................................319

show dot1x ...................................................................................................319

show dot1x statistics ....................................................................................320

wep-encryption-key .....................................................................................320

wep-encryption-key-effective ......................................................................321

wep-keys-format ..........................................................................................322

Chapter 13: SNMP Commands ............................................................... 325 clear snmp trap ............................................................................................325

set snmp community ....................................................................................326

set snmp retries ............................................................................................327

set snmp timeout ..........................................................................................328

set snmp trap ................................................................................................328

set snmp trap auth ........................................................................................330

show snmp ...................................................................................................330

show snmp retries ........................................................................................332

show snmp timeout ......................................................................................333

viii Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Contents

Chapter 14: Spanning Tree Commands................................................... 335 set spantree default-path-cost ...................................................................... 335

set spantree disable ...................................................................................... 336

set spantree enable ....................................................................................... 337

set spantree forward-delay .......................................................................... 338

set spantree hello-time ................................................................................. 339

set spantree max-age ................................................................................... 340

set spantree priority ..................................................................................... 341

set spantree tx-hold-count ........................................................................... 342 set spantree version ..................................................................................... 342

show spantree .............................................................................................. 343

Chapter 15: SSID Commands.................................................................. 347 broadcast ..................................................................................................... 347

closed-system .............................................................................................. 348

dynamic-rekeying-interval .......................................................................... 350

security-mode .............................................................................................. 351

show ssid ..................................................................................................... 352

ssid ............................................................................................................... 354

ssid2lap ........................................................................................................ 355

vlan .............................................................................................................. 356

wep-encryption-key ..................................................................................... 357

wep-encryption-key-effective ..................................................................... 358

Chapter 16: System Commands .............................................................. 361

clear timezone ............................................................................................. 362 configure ..................................................................................................... 362

dir ............................................................................................................... 363

get time ........................................................................................................ 365 hostname ..................................................................................................... 365

nvram initialize ............................................................................................ 366

reset ............................................................................................................. 367 reset powerinline ......................................................................................... 367 set boot bank ............................................................................................... 367

set bups power ............................................................................................. 368 set license .................................................................................................... 368

set queuing scheme ..................................................................................... 369

set system contact ........................................................................................ 370 set system location ...................................................................................... 370

set system name ........................................................................................... 371

set time client .............................................................................................. 372

set time protocol .......................................................................................... 373

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide ix

Contents

set time server ..............................................................................................374

set timezone .................................................................................................374

set web aux-files-url ....................................................................................375

set welcome message ...................................................................................376

show boot bank ............................................................................................376

show bups power .........................................................................................377

show download status ..................................................................................377

show image version .....................................................................................378

show license .................................................................................................378

show module ................................................................................................379

show module-identity ..................................................................................380

show powerinline .........................................................................................381

show queuing scheme ..................................................................................382

show system .................................................................................................383

show tftp download software status ............................................................383

show time .....................................................................................................384

show time parameters ..................................................................................385

show timezone .............................................................................................385

show web aux-files-url ................................................................................386

sync time ......................................................................................................387

tech ..............................................................................................................387

tree ...............................................................................................................387

Chapter 17: CLI User Interface Commands ............................................ 389 clear screen ..................................................................................................389

help ..............................................................................................................390

prompt-length ..............................................................................................390

retstatus ........................................................................................................391

set logout .....................................................................................................391

set terminal recovery password ...................................................................392

show logout .................................................................................................393

show timeout ...............................................................................................393

terminal ........................................................................................................394

x

Chapter 18: User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands ...................... 395

allowed-ap-list .............................................................................................396

clear radius authentication server ................................................................397

home-gateway ..............................................................................................398

policy-user-group ........................................................................................399

set radius authentication ..............................................................................400

set radius authentication retry-number ........................................................401

set radius authentication retry-time .............................................................401

set radius authentication secret ....................................................................402

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Contents

set radius authentication server ................................................................... 403

set radius authentication udp-port ............................................................... 404 set radius secret ........................................................................................... 404

show ............................................................................................................ 405 show radius authentication .......................................................................... 405

show user group table .................................................................................. 406

show username ............................................................................................ 407

show users profile ....................................................................................... 408

user-group ................................................................................................... 409

username ..................................................................................................... 411

vlan .............................................................................................................. 412

Chapter 19: Wireless Domain Commands .............................................. 415 show wireless domain parameters ............................................................... 415

wireless-domain-servers .............................................................................. 416

wireless-domain-secret ................................................................................ 417

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide xi

Contents xii Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 1

Using the CLI

Overview

This chapter describes the Avaya W310 command line interface (CLI) architecture and conventions, and provides instructions for accessing the Avaya W310 for configuration purposes.

The configuration procedure involves

• establishing a Telnet session or a serial connection and

• using the Avaya W310’s internal CLI.

Note: The W310 supports only one active serial connection.

The CLI is command-line driven and does not have any menus. To activate a configuration option, you must type the desired command at the prompt and press Enter.

You can also configure your Avaya W310 using the W310 Manager with its graphical user interface. For details, see the Avaya™ W310 User’s Guide and the Avaya™ W310 Device

Manager User’s Guide on the Documentation and Utilities CD.

Chapter Contents

This chapter contains the following sections:

• Symbols for Notes, Cautions, and Warnings

Conventions Used

CLI Help

Command Line Prompt

Navigation, Cursor Movement and Shortcuts

Command Modes

Command Syntax

Universal Commands

Security Levels

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 1

2

Chapter 1 Using the CLI

Conventions Used

The following conventions are used in this manual to convey instructions and information:

• Mandatory keywords are in boldface.

• Variables that you supply are in pointed brackets <>.

• Optional keywords are in square brackets [].

• Alternative but mandatory keywords are grouped in braces {} and separated by a vertical bar |.

• If you enter an alphanumeric string of two words or more, enclose the string in inverted commas.

• Information displayed on screen is displayed in text font.

CLI Help

The CLI has its own Help utility. Use the following key sequences to operate the CLI Help:

• To display all commands available in a command mode a question mark.

• To display all commands starting with a certain string, type the first few letters followed by a question mark.

• To get help containing all command parameters with their legal values as well as its syntax and an example, type a question mark at the end of command or at the stage where it is unique.

• Use the Tab key to complete an unambiguous command.

Example: W310> show?

Command Line Prompt

The command prompt is not hierarchical in structure. If you wish to use several commands, each beginning with the same keyword, you must retype all parts of the command each time.

For example, if after you want to set the system contact and the system name you must type both set system contact and set system name. However, you can use command abbreviations.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 1 Navigation, Cursor Movement and Shortcuts

Navigation, Cursor Movement and Shortcuts

The CLI contains a simple text editor with these functions:

Table 1.1

Navigation, Cursor Movement and Shortcuts

Keyboard

Backspace

Up arrow/Down arrow

Left arrow/Right arrow

Tab

Enter

" "

Functions

Deletes the previous character

Scrolls back and forward through the command history buffer

Moves the cursor left or right

Completes the abbreviated command. Type the minimum number of characters unique to the command. An exception is the Reset System command which you must type in full.

Executes a single-line command

If you type a name with quotation marks, the marks are ignored.

Command Modes

You must be in the correct command mode to issue specific CLI commands. For example, if the command is for a Light Access Point (LAP) connected to a port on the W310, then you must be in the LAP mode. Make sure you are in the correct command mode before you start your configuration.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 3

Chapter 1 Using the CLI

Table 1.2

CLI Command Modes

4

Command Mode Description

Root

SSID

LAP

LAP Template

AP Group

Interface

User Group

ACL List

QoS List

To Access Prompt

Configures and displays SSID settings.

Configures and displays LAP settings.

Accesses the radio card templates.

! The W310 has one LAP template that consists of two subtemplates:

802.11a radio cards, and

802.11g radio cards.

Configures AP groups, also called policy enforcement points

(PEPs).

Configures user groups.

Configures QoS policies.

Log in ssid <name> lap <lap-name> lap-template

<template-name> interface AP-Group

<group-name>

Determined by security level of user account:

• >

• #

• (super)#

See

Security Levels for more

information.

(SSID <ssid-name>)#

(LAP <lap-name>)#

(802.1 <template-name> template)

(AP-Group <group-name>)# user-group <groupname>

(User group <group-name>)#

(ACL <index>)# list <index> ip qos-list <index> (QoS <index>)#

1 of 2

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 1 Command Modes

Table 1.2

CLI Command Modes

Command Mode Description

IP Rule Configures IP policy rules or QoS policy rules.

Composite

Operation

DSCP Table

Configures composite operations.

Configures DSCP values in the DSCP table.

To Access Prompt

ip-rule {<index> | default}

! You must be in ACL List or QoS List mode to enter this command. compositeoperation <index>

! You must be in either

ACL List or

QoS List mode to enter this command. dscp-table <value>

! You must be in either

ACL List or

QoS List mode to enter this command.

• (ACL <index>/ ip rule {<index> | default}#

• (QoS <index>/ ip rule {<index> | default}#

(.../CompOp <index-number>)#

(.../dscp <value>)#

2 of 2

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 5

6

Chapter 1 Using the CLI

Command Syntax

Commands are not case-sensitive. That is, uppercase and lowercase characters may be interchanged freely.

Command Abbreviations

All commands and parameters in the CLI can be truncated to an abbreviation of any length, as long as the abbreviation is not ambiguous. For example, version can be abbreviated ver

.

For ambiguous commands, type the beginning letters on the command line and then use the

Tab key to toggle through all the possible commands beginning with these letters.

Universal Commands

Universal commands are commands that can be issued anywhere in the hierarchical tree.

Top and Up commands

The Up command moves you up to the next highest level in the CLI command hierarchy.

The Top command moves you to the highest level.

Retstatus command

Use the retstatus command to show whether the last CLI command you performed was successful. It displays the return status of the previous command.

The syntax for this command is: retstatus

Output Example:

W310 # set port negotiation 4 disable

Link negotiation protocol disabled on port 4.

Tree command

The tree command displays the commands that are available at your current location in the CLI hierarchy.

The syntax for this command is: tree

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 1 Security Levels

Security Levels

There are four security access levels – User, Privileged, Supervisor, and Technician.

• User level is a general access level used to show system parameter values.

• Privileged level is used by site personnel to access configuration options.

• Supervisor level is used to define user names, passwords, and access levels of up to ten local users.

• Technician level is for use by Avaya Technical Support only.

A login name and password are always required to access the CLI and the commands. The login names and passwords, and security levels are established using the username command.

Entering the Supervisor Level

The Supervisor level is the level in which you first enter the Avaya W310 CLI and establish user names for up to 10 local users. When you enter the Supervisor level, you are asked for a

Login name. Type root as the Login name and the default password root (in lowercase letters):

Welcome to W310

Login: root

Password:****

Password accepted.

W310-N(super)#

Defining new users

Define new users and access levels using the username command in Supervisor Level.

Exiting the Supervisor Level

To exit the Supervisor level, type the command exit.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 7

Chapter 1 Using the CLI

Entering the CLI

To enter the CLI, enter your username and password. Your access level is indicated in the prompt as follows:

The User level prompt is shown below:

W310-N>

The Privileged level prompt is shown below:

W310-N#

The Supervisor level prompt is shown below:

W310-N(super)#

Entering the Technician Level

This level is can be accessed only from the Privileged and Supervisor levels not from the

User level.

This feature is not documented and is for use by Avaya Technical Support only.

8 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2

AP Group Commands

This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure access point (AP) groups:

add-ports

delete-ports

interface AP-Group

show AP-Group

add-ports

User level: supervisor

Command Mode: AP Group Interface

Use the add-ports command to add a port or ports to an Access Point (AP) Group. The ports cannot be associated with any other AP Group.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: add-ports <ports>

Syntax

<ports>

Description

Port number. The port cannot be attached to any other AP Group.

To specify a port or range of ports, for example, 8-12.

Example:

To add a port to an AP Group:

W310-1(super/AP-Group flr3)# add-ports 2,4,5-8

W310-1(super/AP-Group flr3)#

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 9

Chapter 2 AP Group Commands

Related Commands:

• Use

delete-ports

to delete ports that are attached to the AP group.

• Use

interface AP-Group to create an AP group.

• Use the

show AP-Group

command to display the AP-Group interface parameters and port members.

delete-ports

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: AP Group Interface

Use the delete-ports command to delete ports from an Access Point (AP) Group. If you do not specify a port number, the switch displays a list of ports that are attached to the AP

Group.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: delete-ports <ports>

Syntax

<ports>

Description

Port number of the port you want to delete.

Example:

To delete a port from an AP Group:

W310-1(super/AP-Group engineering)# delete-port 8

Done!

W310-1(super/AP-Group engineering)#

Note: If the port specified is not a member of the AP Group, you receive the message: port x is not a member in the AP Group

10 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 2

Related Commands:

• Use the

add-ports

command to add a port or ports to an Access Point (AP) Group.

The ports cannot be associated with any other AP Group.

• Use the

show AP-Group command to display the AP-Group interface parameters and

port members.

interface AP-Group

User level: supervisor

Use the interface AP-Group command to create an Access Point (AP) group interface. This name represents a Light Access Point’s (LAP) AP group name.

A default AP Group named Default exists on the W310. This AP Group will use the following policy rules:

• Ingress and egress direction of the default AP group has an attached default ACL policy. of allow all traffic.

Use the [no] form of this command to remove the name for the AP Group.

Syntax:

[no] interface AP-Group <group-name>

The syntax for this command is:

Syntax

<group-name>

Description

AP Group name that pertains to a Light Access Point. Use up to

20 characters.

Example:

To create an AP group name:

W310-1(super)# interface AP-Group engineering

W310-1(super/AP-Group engineering)#

Related Commands:

• Use the

add-ports

command to add a port or ports to an Access Point (AP) Group.

The ports cannot be associated with any other AP Group.

Use delete-ports

to delete ports that are attached to the AP group.

• Use the

show AP-Group

command to display the AP-Group interface parameters and

port members.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 11

Chapter 2 AP Group Commands

show AP-Group

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Root, AP-Group Interface

Use the show ap group command to display the AP-Group interface parameters and port members.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show AP-Group

Example:

W310-1# show ap-group num of entries 3

AP-Group Name AP-Group Id ports

--------------------- ----------- ------

floor2 1 1

floor1 2 4

floor3 3 8

Related Commands:

• Use the

add-ports

command to add a port or ports to an Access Point (AP) Group.

The ports cannot be associated with any other AP Group.

• Use

delete-ports

to delete ports that are attached to the AP group.

• Use

interface AP-Group

to create an AP group.

12 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 3

Configuration File Commands

This chapter describes the commands that you use to manage the W310 configuration files:

copy mobility-running tftp

copy mobility-startup tftp

copy module-config tftp

copy running-config tftp

copy stack-config tftp

copy startup-config tftp

copy tftp EW_Archive

copy tftp LAP_image

copy tftp mobility-startup

copy tftp module-config

copy tftp policy-startup

copy tftp stack-config

copy tftp startup-config

copy tftp SW_image

copy tftp SW_powerinline_image

copy tftp wireless-gateway-startup

copy wireless-gateway-running tftp

copy wireless-gateway-startup tftp

erase startup-config

show copy status

show erase status

show running-config

show upload status

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 13

Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands

copy mobility-running tftp

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the copy mobility-running tftp command to upload the mobility running configuration from the current NVRAM configuration to a Trivial File Transfer Protocol

(TFTP) server.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: copy mobility-running tftp <filename> <ip_address>

Syntax

<filename>

<ip_address>

Description

The destination file name (full path)

The IP address of the TFTP server

Example:

W310-1# copy mobility-running tftp c:\mobility01.cfg

149.49.66.17

Beginning upload operation ...

This operation may take a few minutes...

Please refrain from any other operation during this time.

For more information, use 'show upload status' command.

copy mobility-startup tftp

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the copy mobility-startup tftp command to upload the mobility startup configuration from the current NVRAM configuration to a TFTP sever.

14 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 3

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: copy mobility-startup tftp <filename> <ip_address>

Syntax

<filename>

<ip_address>

Description

The destination file name (full path)

The IP address of the TFTP server

Example:

W310-1# copy mobility-startup tftp c:\mobility01.cfg

149.49.66.17

Beginning upload operation ...

This operation may take a few minutes...

Please refrain from any other operation during this time.

For more information, use 'show upload status' command.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 15

Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands

copy module-config tftp

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the copy module-config tftp command to upload the W310 configuration from the current NVRAM running configuration to a TFTP server.

If an error occurred during upload (you can check this using the command show tftp upload status

) you must fix the problem. The following is a list of possible problems:

If this is the problem:

Then perform the upload procedure again

twice as follows:

You did not create an empty text file at the destination server (0 Bytes).

You do not have the correct path to the file.

The destination server is not active/ on.

Delete the destination file and recreate a correctly named empty file at the destination server (0 bytes)

Type the command copy module-config tftp

for the first time.

Delete the destination file and recreate a correctly named empty file at the destination server (0 bytes)

The destination server is unreachable.

Type the command copy module-config tftp

again, a second time.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: copy module-config tftp <filename> <ip> <module number>

Syntax

<filename>

<ip>

<module number>

Description

The destination file name (full path)

The IP address of the TFTP server

1

16 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 3

Example:

W310-1# copy module-config tftp c:\config\switch1.cfg

192.168.49.10 1

Beginning upload operation ...

This operation may take a few minutes...

Please refrain from any other operation during this time.

For more information, use 'show tftp upload status' command

********************************************************************

* If you are currently running the W310 Device Manager application,*

* it is recommended to exit from it before performing configuration*

* download operations. *

********************************************************************

copy running-config tftp

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the copy running-config tftp command to upload the W310 running configuration from the current NVRAM running configuration to a TFTP server.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: copy running-config tftp <filename> <ip>

Syntax

<filename>

<ip>

Description

Destination file name on the TFTP server (full path).

The ip address of the TFTP server.

Example (for Windows):

W310-1# copy running-config tftp c:\w310\running.cfg

149.49.100.41

Example: (for Unix):

W310-1# copy running-config tftp /folder/w310/running.cfg

149.49.100.41

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 17

Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands

copy stack-config tftp

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the copy stack-config tftp command to upload the stack-level parameters from the current NVRAM running configuration to a TFTP server.

! Create the file into which you wish to upload the stack-level parameters prior to executing this command.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: copy stack-config tftp <filename> <ip>

Syntax

<filename>

<ip>

Description

The destination file name (full path)

The IP address of the TFTP server

Example:

W310-1# copy stack-config tftp c:\conf.cfg 192.168.49.10

Beginning upload operation ...

This operation may take a few minutes...

Please refrain from any other operation during this time.

For more information , use 'upload status' command

********************************************************************

* If you are currently running the W310 Device Manager application,*

* it is recommended to exit from it before performing configuration*

* download operations. *

********************************************************************

18 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 3

copy startup-config tftp

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the copy startup-config tftp command to upload the W310 startup configuration from the current NVRAM startup configuration to a TFTP server.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: copy startup-config tftp <filename> <ip>

Syntax

<filename>

<ip>

Description

Destination file name on the tftp server (full path).

The ip address of the tftp server.

Example (for Windows):

W310-1# copy startup-config tftp c:\w310\startup.cfg

149.49.100.41

Example: (for Unix):

W310-1# copy startup-config tftp /folder/w310/startup.cfg

149.49.100.41

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 19

Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands

copy tftp EW_Archive

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the copy tftp EW-archive command to download the W310 Manager application from a TFTP server to the switch.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: copy tftp EW_archive <filename> <ip> <module number>

Syntax

<filename>

<ip>

<module number>

Description

W310 Manager image file name (full path)

The IP address of the TFTP server

1

Example (for Windows):

W310-1# copy tftp EW-archive c:\W310\switch1.cfg

192.168.49.10 1

Example: (for Unix):

W310-1# copy tftp EW-archive /folder/startup.cfg

149.49.100.41 1

20 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 3

copy tftp LAP_image

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the copy tftp LAP_image command to download a Light Access Point configuration file from a TFTP server to the current NVRAM running configuration of the

W310.

! Before downloading the Light Access Point configuration file, you must initialize

NVRAM ( nvram initialize

command).

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: copy tftp LAP_image <platform> <filename> <ip_address>

<bank_value>

Syntax

<platform>

<filename> ip bank_value

Description

Type of Access Point.

• LAP

• AP4

The source file name on the TFTP server (full path)

The IP address of the TFTP server

Bank from which the LAP will boot. This value is one of the following:

bank-A

• bank-B

auto - will boot from the first available

Example (for Windows):

W310-1# W310-1(configure)# copy tftp LAP_image AP600

c:\lap_image01 149.49.66.17 bank-a

Beginning download operation ...

This operation may take a few minutes...

Please refrain from any other operation during this time.

For more information, use 'show tftp download software status' command.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 21

Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands

copy tftp mobility-startup

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the copy tftp mobility-startup command to download a mobility startup configuration file from a TFTP server to the current NVRAM mobility startup configuration of the W310.

! Before downloading the mobility startup configuration file, you should initialize

NVRAM ( nvram initialize

command).

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: copy tftp mobility-startup <filename> <ip_address>

Syntax

<filename>

<ip_address>

Description

The source file name on the TFTP server (full path)

The IP address of the TFTP server

Example (for Windows):

W310-1# copy tftp mobility-startup c:\mobility01.cfg

149.49.66.17

Beginning download operation ...

This operation may take a few minutes...

Please refrain from any other operation during this time.

For more information, use 'show tftp download software status' command.

22 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 3

copy tftp module-config

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the copy tftp module-config command to download a W310-level configuration file from a TFTP server to the current NVRAM running configuration of a

W310.

! Before downloading the W310 configuration file, you should initialize NVRAM

(

nvram initialize

command).

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: copy tftp module-config <filename> <ip>

Syntax

<filename>

<ip>

Description

The source file name on the TFTP server (full path)

The IP address of the TFTP server

Example (for Windows):

W310-1# copy tftp module-config c:\config\switch1.cfg

192.168.49.10

Example: (for Unix):

W310-1# copy tftp module-config /folder/startup.cfg

192.168.49.10

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 23

Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands

copy tftp policy-startup

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the copy tftp policy-startup command to download a policy configuration file from a TFTP server to the current NVRAM running configuration of the W310.

! Before downloading the policy configuration file, you must initialize NVRAM ( nvram initialize

command).

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: copy tftp policy-startup <filename> <ip>

Syntax

<filename>

<ip>

Description

The source file name on the TFTP server (full path)

The IP address of the TFTP server

Example (for Windows):

W310-1# copy tftp policy-startup c:\config\switch1.cfg

192.168.49.10

Example (for Unix):

W310-1# copy tftp policy-startup /folder/switch1.cfg

192.168.49.10

24 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 3

copy tftp stack-config

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the copy tftp stack-config command to download a stack-level configuration file from a TFTP server to the current NVRAM running configuration of the

W310.

! Before downloading the stack-level configuration file, you must initialize NVRAM

(

nvram initialize

command).

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: copy tftp stack-config <filename> <ip>

Syntax

<filename>

<ip>

Description

The source file name on the TFTP server (full path)

The IP address of the TFTP server

Example (for Windows):

W310-1# copy tftp stack-config c:\config\switch1.cfg

192.168.49.10

Example (for Unix):

W310-1# copy tftp stack-config /folder/switch1.cfg

192.168.49.10

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 25

Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands

copy tftp startup-config

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the copy tftp startup-config command to download a startup configuration file from a TFTP server to the Startup Configuration file in the W310 NVRAM.

! Before downloading the startup configuration file, you must initialize NVRAM ( nvram initialize

command).

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: copy tftp startup-config <filename> <ip>

Syntax

<filename>

<ip>

Description

Source file name on the TFTP server (full path)

The IP address of the TFTP server.

Example (for Windows):

W310-1# copy tftp startup-config c:\W310\startup.cfg

149.49.100.41

Example: (for Unix):

W310-1# copy tftp startup-config /folder/startup.cfg

149.49.100.41

26 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 3

copy tftp SW_image

Use the copy tftp SW_image command to download a new firmware software version to bank B while either keeping the old version in bank A, or downloading the Embedded

Web manager software to bank A.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: copy tftp SW_image <sw-image-file> EW_archive <EmWeb_File>

<ip_address> <mod_num>

Syntax

<sw-image-file>

<EmWeb_File>

<ip_address>

<mod_num>

Description

Firmware image file name (full path)

Embedded Web Manager image file name (full path) -

! If the Embedded Web Manager file name that you enter does not exist, the Embedded Web image is not downloaded and there will no longer be an image residing on the W310.

The IP address of the TFTP server

1

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 27

Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands

Example (for Windows):

W310-1# copy tftp SW_image c:\versions\W310\W310t EW_image

x 149.49.138.170 1

Example (for Unix):

W310-1# copy tftp SW_image /folder/versions/W310/W310t

EW_image x 149.49.138.170 1

Example:

W310-1# copy tftp SW_image /home/W310/viisa EW_archive 1

135.64.103.104 1

Module : 1

Source file : /home/W310/viisa

Destination file : W310

Host : 135.64.103.104

Running state : Download Process Started

Failure display : no-error

Last warning : -

.....

Module : 1

Source file : /home/W310/viisa

Destination file : W310

Host : 135.64.103.104

Running state : Testing ...

Failure display : no-error

Last warning : -

.............

Module : 1

Source file : /home/W310/viisa

Destination file : W310

Host : 135.64.103.104

Running state : Erasing FLASH

Failure display : no-error

Last warning : -

.....

28 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 3

Module : 1

Source file : /home/W310/viisa

Destination file : W310

Host : 135.64.103.104

Running state : Downloading ...

Failure display : no-error

Last warning : -

...

Module : 1

Source file : /home/W310/viisa

Destination file : W310

Host : 135.64.103.104

Running state : Download Ok

Failure display : no-error

Last warning : -

copy tftp SW_powerinline_image

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the copy tftp SW_powerinline_image command to download the inline software application from a TFTP server to the memory of a designated module. You need to be in privilege mode to execute this command.

! Before executing the download, the embedded software performs the following checks on the TFTP server file:

— Ensures that the file size is within its allocated space.

— Checks that the file contains embedded web SW for this application

— Verifies the file validity by calculating the checksum.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 29

Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: copy tftp SW_powerinline_image <image-file> <ip-addr> <modnum>

Syntax

<image_file>

<ip_addr>

<mod_num>

Description

Common name for the file that contain the Power over

Ethernet (PoE) Software image and the Embedded Web archive (full path)

IP address of the TFTP host

1

Example:

W310-1# copy tftp SW_powerinline_image c:\W310\w310_203

192.168.49.10 1

Module: 5

Source file: c:\w310\w310_203

Destination file:

Host:

Powerinline

192.168.49.10

Running state:

Failure Display:

Last warning:

Downloading

Access Violation

Download completed

copy tftp wireless-gateway-startup

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the copy tftp wireless-gateway-startup command to download a wireless gateway configuration file from a TFTP server to the current NVRAM startup configuration of the W310.

! Before downloading the wireless gateway configuration file, you must initialize

NVRAM ( nvram initialize

command).

30 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 3

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: copy tftp mobility-startup <filename> <ip>

Syntax

<filename>

<ip>

Description

Source file name on the TFTP server (full path)

The IP address of the TFTP server

Example (for Windows):

W310-1# copy wireless-gateway-startup tftp c:\wireless-

gateway01.cfg 192.149.49.66

Beginning upload operation ...

This operation may take a few minutes...

Please refrain from any other operation during this time.

For more information, use 'show upload status' command.

Example (for Unix):

W310-1# copy tftp wireless-gateway-startup /folder/

gateway01.cfg 192.168.49.66

copy wireless-gateway-running tftp

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the copy wireless-gateway-running tftp command to upload the wireless gateway running configuration from the W310 NVRAM configuration to a TFTP server.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 31

Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: copy wireless-gateway-running tftp <filename> <ip>

Syntax

<filename>

<ip>

Description

The destination file name on the TFTP server (full path)

The IP address of the TFTP server

Example:

W310-1# copy wireless-gateway-running tftp c:\wireless-

gateway01.cfg 192.149.49.66

Beginning upload operation ...

This operation may take a few minutes...

Please refrain from any other operation during this time.

For more information, use 'show upload status' command.

32 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 3

copy wireless-gateway-startup tftp

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the copy wireless-gateway-startup tftp command to upload the wireless gateway startup configuration from the current NVRAM configuration to a TFTP server.

! Create the file into which you wish to upload the wireless gateway parameters prior to executing this command.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: copy wireless-gateway-startup tftp <filename> <ip>

Syntax

<filename>

<ip>

Description

The destination file name on the TFTP server (full path)

The IP address of the TFTP server

Example:

W310-1# copy wireless-gateway-startup tftp c:\wireless-

gateway01.cfg 192.149.49.66

Beginning upload operation ...

This operation may take a few minutes...

Please refrain from any other operation during this time.

For more information, use 'show upload status' command.

erase startup-config

! This command is not applicable.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 33

Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands

show copy status

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show copy status command to show the status of the local configuration copy operation.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show copy status

Example:

W310-1> show copy status

Module #1

===========

Module : 1

Source file : .router-startup

Destination file : .router-running

Host : -

Running state : Idle

Failure display : (null)

Last warning : No-warning

show erase status

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show erase status command to view the status of the erase configuration operation.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show erase status

34 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 3

show running-config

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show running-config command to display the W310 running configuration, which includes the actual templates applied to the W310 and any W110s connected to its ports.

This command does not display the actual configuration being used for the W110. It displays

only the running templates. Use the show lap parameters

command to display the actual configuration.

Note: When you run this command, the command prompt may appear within the actual result. This is not an error but is due to the response time for receiving the data.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show running-config

Example:

W310-1> show running config

#!#[email protected] DO NOT REMOVE THIS LINE - Avaya Inc. - W310 - configuration

!

!

! Avaya Inc. - W310 - configuration

! version 4.3.24

user-group default

exit

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 35

Chapter 3 Configuration File Commands

show upload status

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show upload status commands to display the status of the current TFTP configuration file copy process to or from the device.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show upload status [<mod_num>]

Syntax

[<mod_num>]

Description

1

Example:

W310-1> show upload status 1

Module : 1

Source file : stack-config

Destination file : c:\conf.cfg

Host : 149.49.36.200

Running state : Executing

Failure display : (null)

Last warning : No-warning

36 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 4

Connection Management Commands

This chapter describes the commands that you use to manage connections to the W310 and the network:

set allowed managers

set allowed managers ip

set inband vlan

set interface inband

set interface ppp

set interface ppp {enable | enable-always | disable | off | reset}

set ppp authentication incoming

set ppp baud-rate

set ppp chap-secret

set ppp incoming timeout

show allowed managers status

show allowed managers table

ip http enable

ip telnet enable

ip telnet-client

ping

show ppp authentication

show ppp baud-rate

show ppp configuration

show ppp incoming timeout

show ppp session

show secure current

telnet

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 37

Chapter 4 Connection Management Commands

set allowed managers

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set allowed managers command to enable or disable the Allowed Managers feature.

When this feature is enabled, only those stations whose IP addresses are listed in the

Allowed Managers table can access the device over Telnet, SNMP, or HTTP.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set allowed managers {enabled | disabled}

Example:

W310-1(super)# set allowed managers enabled

Managers are enabled

Related Commands:

• Use the

set allowed managers ip

command to add or remove an IP address

from the Allowed Managers table.

• Use the

show allowed managers status

command to display the activation

status of the Allowed Managers feature.

• Use the

show allowed managers table

to display the list of the twenty

possible allowed managers IP addresses.

38 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 4

set allowed managers ip

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set allowed manager ip command to add or remove an IP address from the

Allowed Managers table. The Allowed Managers table can contain up to twenty (20) IP addresses.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set allowed managers ip {add | delete} <IP address>

Syntax

add delete

<IP address>

Description

Adds specified IP address to the Allowed Managers table

Deletes specified IP address from the Allowed Managers table

IP address to be added or removed

Example:

W310-1# set allowed managers ip add 149.49.32.134

Ip was added to the table

Related Commands:

• Use the

set allowed managers

command to enable or disable the Allowed

Managers feature.

• Use the

show allowed managers status

command to display the activation status of the Allowed Managers feature.

• Use the

show allowed managers table

to display the list of the twenty possible allowed managers IP addresses.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 39

Chapter 4 Connection Management Commands

set inband vlan

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set inband vlan command to set the inband management VLAN.

! If you change the management VLAN, you must reset all the W310s in your domain in order to ensure that the VLAN change takes effect.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set inband vlan <value>

Syntax

<value>

Description

Number of the VLAN to be assigned to the management interface.

Example:

W310-1# set inband vlan 1

Management VLAN number set to 1

set interface inband

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set interface inband command to configure the Management inband interface.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set interface inband <vlan> <ip_addr> <netmask>

40

Syntax

<vlan>

<ip_addr>

<netmask>

Description

The number of the VLAN to be assigned to the interface

IP address of the inband interface

Subnet mask

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 4

Example:

To configure the inband interface on VLAN 1, IP address 1.1.1.1 and netmask

255.255.255.24:

W310-1# set interface inband 1 1.1.1.1 255.255.255.24

Interface inband IP address set.

You must reset the device in order for the change to take effect.

Related Commands:

Use the show l2-module-config

command to display information on network interfaces.

set interface ppp

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set interface ppp command to configure the PPP interface IP parameters.

You must configure an IP address and net-mask for the W310 before you can establish a PPP connection. The IP address is a dummy address that is shared between two peers, and must be taken from a subnet that is different from the switch’s inband IP subnet.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set interface ppp <ip_addr> <net-mask>

Syntax

<ip_addr>

<net-mask>

Description

IP address used by the W310 to connect via its PPP interface

Subnet mask used by the W310 to connect via its PPP interface

Example:

W310-1# set interface ppp 149.49.34.125 24

Interface ppp ip address set

Related Commands:

Use the show l2-module-config

command to display information on network interfaces.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 41

Chapter 4 Connection Management Commands

set interface ppp {enable | enable-always | disable | off | reset}

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set interface ppp command to enter modem mode, enter terminal mode, disconnect the PPP session or to reset the connected modem.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set interface ppp {enable | enable-always | disable | off | reset}

Syntax

enable enable-always disable off reset

Description

Enable PPP and enter modem mode.

Enter modem mode every time that the proprietary modem cable is plugged into the console port.

Disable PPP and enter terminal mode

Disconnect the active PPP session.

Reset the connected modem.

Example:

W310-1# set interface ppp reset

PPP has reset the connected modem.

Example:

W310-1# set interface ppp enable

Entering the Modem mode within 60 seconds...

Please check that the proprietary modem cable is plugged into the console port

Example:

W310-1# set interface ppp disable

Entering the Terminal mode immediately

42 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 4

set ppp authentication incoming

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set ppp authentication incoming command to define the authentication method used for a PPP server or client session.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set ppp authentication incoming {pap | chap | none}

Syntax

pap chap none

Description

Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) method

Challenge-Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) method

No authentication

Example:

W310-1# set ppp authentication incoming chap

PPP requires CHAP authentication for incoming sessions.

Related Commands:

• Use the

show ppp authentication

command to display the authentication method used for PPP sessions.

• Use the

show ppp configuration

command to display the ppp configuration.

set ppp baud-rate

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set ppp baud-rate command to define the baud rate used in PPP sessions.

! The peer baud rate must be set at the same value as the host.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set ppp baud-rate {9600 | 19200 | 38400}

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 43

Chapter 4 Connection Management Commands

Example:

W310-1# set ppp baud-rate 38400 ppp baud rate was set to 38400

Related Commands:

• Use the

show ppp baud-rate command to display the ppp baud-rate.

• Use the

show ppp configuration

command to display the ppp configuration.

set ppp chap-secret

User level: supervisor

Use the set ppp chap-secret command to configure the “shared secret” used in PPP sessions with CHAP authentication. The chap-secret is not transferable via the configuration upload/download mechanism.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set ppp chap-secret <chap-secret>

Syntax

<chap-secret>

Description

The shared secret, 4 to 32 characters.

44 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 4

Example:

W310-1(super)# set ppp chap secret hush

PPP shared secret for CHAP authentication is set

set ppp incoming timeout

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set ppp incoming timeout command to set the number of minutes until the system automatically disconnects an idle PPP incoming session.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set ppp incoming timeout <time>

Syntax

<time>

Description

The timeout in minutes

Example:

W310-1# set ppp incoming timeout 15

PPP incoming session will automatically disconnect after 15 minutes of idle time

Related Commands:

Use this show ppp incoming timeout

command to display the time in minutes that a PPP session can remain idle before being automatically disconnected.

• Use the

show ppp configuration

command to display the ppp configuration.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 45

Chapter 4 Connection Management Commands

show allowed managers status

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show allowed managers status command to display the activation status of the Allowed Managers feature.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show allowed managers status

Example:

W310-1(super)# show allowed managers status

Managers are disabled.

Related Commands:

• Use the

set allowed managers

command to enable or disable the Allowed

Managers feature.

• Use the

set allowed managers ip

• Use the

show allowed managers table

to display the list of the twenty

possible allowed managers IP addresses.

show allowed managers table

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show allowed managers table to display the list of the twenty possible allowed managers IP addresses.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show allowed managers table

46 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 4

Example:

W310-1(super)# show allowed managers table

1 ) 149.49.32.134

2 ) Not Used

3 ) Not Used

4 ) Not Used

5 ) Not Used

6 ) Not Used

7 ) Not Used

8 ) Not Used

9 ) Not Used

10) Not Used

11) Not Used

12) Not Used

13) Not Used

14) Not Used

15) Not Used

16) Not Used

17) Not Used

18) Not Used

19) Not Used

20) Not Used

Related Commands:

• Use the

set allowed managers

command to enable or disable the Allowed

Managers feature.

• Use the

set allowed managers ip

• Use the

show allowed managers status

command to display the activation status of the Allowed Managers feature.

ip http enable

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the ip http enable command to enable HTTP access to the device. Use the no ip http

command to disable HTTP access to the device.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: ip http enable no ip http

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 47

Chapter 4 Connection Management Commands

Example:

W310-1# ip http enable

Done!

Example:

W310-1# no ip http

Done!

ip telnet enable

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the ip telnet enable command to enable Telnet access to the switch. Use the no ip telnet

command to disable Telnet access to the switch.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: ip telnet enable no ip telnet

Example:

W310-1# ip telnet enable

Done!

Example:

W310-1# no ip telnet

This will prevent future remote telnet sessions and disconnect all active telnet sessions - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y

Done!

Related Commands:

Use the

ip telnet-client

command to enable the switch to act as a Telnet client.

48 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 4

ip telnet-client

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the ip telnet-client command to enable the switch to act as a Telnet client. Use the no ip telnet-client command to disable the switch from acting as a Telnet client.

! This command can be run only from the console port on the device.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: ip telnet-client no ip telnet-client

Example:

W310-1# ip telnet-client

Done!

Example:

W310-1# no ip telnet-client

Done!

Related Commands:

Use the ip telnet enable

command to enable Telnet access to the switch.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 49

Chapter 4 Connection Management Commands

ping

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the ping command to send ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: ping [<host> [<number>]]

Syntax

<host>

<number>

Description

Host IP address or Internet address of route destination. If omitted, then the host IP address specified in the last ping command is used.

Number of packets to send. If missing, then the number specified in the last ping command is used. If the last number is not available, the default is 4.

Example:

To ping the IP address 149.49.48.1 three times:

W310-1> ping 149.49.48.1 3

PING 149.49.48.1: 56 data bytes

64 bytes from 149.49.48.1: icmp_seq=0. time=0. ms

64 bytes from 149.49.48.1: icmp_seq=1. time=0. ms

64 bytes from 149.49.48.1: icmp_seq=2. time=0. ms

----149.49.48.1 PING Statistics----

3 packets transmitted, 3 packets received, 0% packet loss round-trip (ms) min/avg/max = 0/0/0

50 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 4

show ppp authentication

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show ppp authentication command to display the authentication method used for PPP sessions.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show ppp authentication

Example:

W310-1> show ppp authentication

PPP Authentication Parameters:

------------------------------

Incoming: CHAP

Related Commands:

Use the set ppp authentication incoming

command to define the authentication

method used for a PPP server or client session.

show ppp baud-rate

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show ppp baud-rate command to display the ppp baud-rate.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show ppp baud-rate

Example:

W310-1> show ppp baud-rate

PPP baud rate is 38400

Related Commands:

Use the set ppp baud-rate

command to define the baud rate used in PPP sessions.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 51

Chapter 4 Connection Management Commands

show ppp configuration

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show ppp configuration command to display the ppp configuration.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show ppp configuration

Example:

W310-1> show ppp configuration

PPP baud rate is 38400

PPP incoming timeout is 15 minutes

PPP Authentication Parameters:

------------------------------

Incoming: None

Related Commands:

• Use the

set ppp baud-rate

command to define the baud rate used in PPP

sessions.

• Use the

set ppp incoming timeout

command to set the number of minutes until the system automatically disconnects an idle PPP incoming session.

• Use the

set ppp authentication incoming

command to define the

authentication method used for a PPP server or client session.

show ppp incoming timeout

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use this show ppp incoming timeout command to display the time in minutes that a

PPP session can remain idle before being automatically disconnected.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show ppp incoming timeout

52 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 4

Example:

W310-1> show ppp incoming timeout

PPP incoming timeout is 15 minutes

Related Commands:

Use the

set ppp incoming timeout

command to set the number of minutes until the system automatically disconnects an idle PPP incoming session.

show ppp session

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show ppp session command to display PPP parameters and statistics of an active PPP session.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show ppp session

Example:

W310-1> show ppp session

show secure current

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the show secure current command to list the IP addresses of managers currently connected to the switch.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show secure current

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 53

Chapter 4 Connection Management Commands

Example:

W310-1> show secure current

IP Address Time Since Last Request(In Sec)

-------------- ------------------------------------

135.64.100.205 7

149.49.77.13 13

149.49.77.7 2

telnet

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

! You need to enable this feature using the

ip telnet-client

CLI command.

Use the telnet command to open a Telnet session from the W310.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: telnet <ip-address> [<port-num>]

Syntax

<ip address>

[<port-num>]

Description

IP address of Telnet host

IP port number of Telnet host

Example:

W310-1# telnet 10.10.10.20

54 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 5

Intelligent Multicast Commands

This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure intelligent multicast:

set intelligent-multicast

set intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning time

set intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time

set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time

show intelligent-multicast

show intelligent-multicast hardware-support

Intelligent multicast is an IP multicast filtering application.

set intelligent-multicast

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set intelligent-multicast command to enable or disable intelligent multicast, which is an IP multicast filtering application. For more information on intelligent multicast, see the Installation and Configuration Guide.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set intelligent-multicast {enable | disable}

Example:

W310-1# set intelligent-multicast enable

Done!

Related Commands:

• Use the

set intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning time

command to set the aging time for client ports.

• Use the

set intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time

command to set group filtering time delay.

• Use the

set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time

command to set the aging time for router ports.

• Use the

show intelligent-multicast

command to display the intelligent multicast configuration.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 55

Chapter 5 Intelligent Multicast Commands

set intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning time

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set intelligent-multicast client port pruning time command to set the aging time for client ports. This is the time after which a client port is removed from a session if no IGMP reports are received. The range is 30 to 1800 seconds.

The default setting is 60 seconds.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning time <seconds>

Syntax

<seconds>

Description

Client port pruning time in seconds

Example:

W310-1# set intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning-time

40

Done!

Related Commands:

• Use the

set intelligent-multicast

command to enable or disable intelligent

multicast.

• Use the

set intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time

command to set group filtering time delay

• Use the

set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time

command to set the aging time for router ports.

• Use the

show intelligent-multicast

command to display the intelligent

multicast configuration.

56 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 5

set intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set intelligent-multicast group-filtering delay time command to set group filtering time delays. This is the time that the switch waits between learning of a Multicast group on a certain VLAN and starting to filter traffic for this group.

The valid range is 1 to 300 seconds. The default setting is 60 seconds.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time <seconds>

Syntax

<seconds>

Description

Group filtering time in seconds.

Example:

W310-1# set intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time

40

Done!

Related Commands:

• Use the

set intelligent-multicast

command to enable or disable intelligent multicast.

• Use the

set intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning time

command to set the aging time for client ports.

• Use the

set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time

command to set the aging time for router ports.

• Use the

show intelligent-multicast

command to display the intelligent multicast configuration.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 57

Chapter 5 Intelligent Multicast Commands

set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time command to set the aging time for router ports. This is a timer that ages out Router port information if IGMP queries are not received within the configured time.

The valid range is 30 to 7200 seconds. The default setting is 120 seconds.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time <seconds>

Syntax

<seconds>

Description

Router port pruning time in seconds.

Example:

W310-1# set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning-time

40

Done!

Related Commands:

• Use the

set intelligent-multicast

command to enable or disable intelligent

multicast.

• Use the

set intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning time

command to set the aging time for client ports.

• Use the

set intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time

command to set group filtering time delay

• Use the

show intelligent-multicast

command to display the intelligent

multicast configuration.

58 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 5

show intelligent-multicast

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show intelligent-multicast command to display the intelligent multicast configuration.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show intelligent-multicast

Example:

W310-1> show intelligent-multicast

Intelligent-multicast configuration:

-----------------------------------intelligent-multicast state ---------------------- Disabled

Intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning time --- 600[Sec]

Intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time --- 1800[Sec] intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time - 10[Sec]

Related Commands:

• Use the

set intelligent-multicast

command to enable or disable intelligent multicast.

• Use the

set intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning time

command to set the aging time for client ports.

• Use the

set intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time

command to set group filtering time delay

• Use the

set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time

command to set the aging time for router ports.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 59

Chapter 5 Intelligent Multicast Commands

show intelligent-multicast hardware-support

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show intelligent-multicast hardware-support command to display the intelligent multicast hardware support configuration.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show intelligent-multicast hardware-support

Example:

W310-1> show intelligent-multicast hardware support

Intelligent-multicast HW configuration:

# Module Sub-Module Cascade

------- ---------- --------

1 Support IPMc Not Installed Support IPMc

60 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 6

IP Commands

This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure IP:

clear ip route

ip icmp redirect

set ip route

show interface

show ip route

clear ip route

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the clear ip route command to delete one or all of the dynamic routing entries from the Routing Table.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: clear ip route <destination gateway> <mask>

Syntax Description

<destination gateway> IP address of the IP route

<mask> IP address of the gateway associated with the IP route.

Example:

W310-1> clear ip route 192.168.49.1 255.255.255.0

Related Commands:

• Use the

set ip route

command to add a route to the IP routing table.

• Use the

show ip route

command to display IP routing table entries.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 61

Chapter 6 IP Commands

ip icmp redirect

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the ip icmp redirect command to enable ICMP redirects via the device. Use the no ip icmp redirect

command to disable ICMP redirects via the device.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: ip icmp redirect no ip icmp redirect

Example:

W310-1> ip icmp redirect

Done!

Example:

W310-1# no ip icmp redirect

Done!

set ip route

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set ip route command to add a route to the IP routing table. You can configure from 1 to 10 default static gateways for a W310 switch. To clear a route, use the

clear ip route command.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set ip route <destination> <gateway>

Syntax

<destination>

<gateway>

Description

IP address of the network, or specific host to be added

IP address of the gateway associated with the IP route.

62 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 6

Example:

This example shows how to add a default route to the IP routing table:

W310-1# set ip route 0.0.0.0 192.168.1.1 destination = 0.0.0.0 gateway = 192.168.1.1

ROUTE NET TABLE destination gateway flags Refcnt Use Interface

------------------------------------------------------------------------

0.0.0.0 192.168.1.1 1 1 3199 se0

127.1.1.0 127.1.1.1 1 8 7606 se1

------------------------------------------------------------------------

ROUTE HOST TABLE destination gateway flags Refcnt Use Interface

------------------------------------------------------------------------

127.0.0.1 127.0.0.1 5 2 131 lo0

10.10.10.10 192.168.1.1 7 0 0 se0

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Related Commands:

• Use the

clear ip route

command to clear an entry in the IP routing table.

• Use the

show ip route

command to display IP routing table entries.

show interface

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show interface command to display information on network interfaces.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show interface

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 63

Chapter 6 IP Commands

Example:

W310-1> show interface

Interface Name Status VLAN IP address Netmask

---------------- -------------- ---- --------------- --------------inband disabled 1 135.64.200.105 255.255.255.0

ppp disabled N/A 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

Related Commands:

• Use the

set interface inband command to configure the Management inband

interface.

• Use the

set ip route

command to configure the PPP interface IP parameters.

show ip route

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show ip route command to display IP routing table entries.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show ip route

Example:

W310-1> show ip route

Destination Gateway

------------- -------------

0.0.0.0 149.49.54.1

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

64 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 6

Related Commands:

• Use the

set ip route

command to add a route to the IP routing table.

• Use the

clear ip route command to clear an entry in the IP routing table.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 65

Chapter 6 IP Commands

66 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 7

Layer 2 Switching Commands

This chapter describes the CLI commands that you use to configure the W310:

clear cam

clear vlan

mac-address-authorized-list

mac-address-authorized-list-default

set arp-aging-interval

set arp-tx-interval

set mac-aging

set vlan

show arp-aging-interval

show arp-tx-interval

show cam

show l2-module-config

show l2-stack-config

show mac address authorized list

show mac-aging

show mac-aging-time

show vlan

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 67

Chapter 7 Layer 2 Switching Commands

clear cam

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Deletes all entries in the MAC address table of the switch.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: clear cam

Example:

W310-1> clear cam

CAM table cleared.

clear vlan

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the clear vlan command to delete an existing VLAN and return its ports to the default VLAN 1. When you clear a VLAN, all ports assigned to that VLAN are assigned to the default VLAN 1.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: clear vlan [<vlan-id>|name <vlan_name>]

Syntax

[<vlan_id>]

<vlan_name>

Description

VLAN number

VLAN name

! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.

68 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 7

Example:

W310-1# clear vlan 100

This command will assign all ports on vlan 100 to their default in the entire management domain - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y

VLAN 100 was deleted successfully

Related Commands:

• Use the

set vlan

command to configure VLANs.

• Use the

show vlan

command to display the VLANs configured in the switch.

mac-address-authorized-list

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use mac-address-authorized-list command to add or remove a MAC address from the authorized list of devices. Table can contain up to 10000 entries.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: mac-address-authorized-list {add | remove} <mac-address>

[allow | deny | deny-and- notify]

Syntax Description

{add | remove}

<mac -address>

[allow | deny | denyand-notify]

Specify the operation (add or remove) for the specified MAC address that you want to add or remove from the wireless network.

The MAC address of a device.

Access type for the MAC address that you want to add.

permit - allows wireless network operation for the MAC address.

deny - does not allow wireless network operation for the

MAC address.

deny-and-notify - does not allow wireless network operation for the MAC address and sends a notification to the supervisor.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 69

Chapter 7 Layer 2 Switching Commands

Example:

W310-1# mac-address-authorized-list add 00:04:d0:af:12:4

deny

Done!

Related Commands:

• Use the

mac-address-authorized-list-default

to set the default access type for MAC addresses in the authorized list.

• Use the

show mac address authorized list

command to display a list of authorized MAC addresses and their access settings.

mac-address-authorized-list-default

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the mac-address-authorized-list-default to set the default access type for MAC addresses in the authorized list.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: mac-address-authorized-list-default {allow | deny | deny-andnotify

}

Syntax

{allow | deny | deny-and-notify}

Description

Default access type for the MAC address in the authorized list:

permit—Allows the operation for the MAC addresses.

deny—Does not allow the operation for the MAC addresses.

deny-and-notify—Does not allow the operation for the

MAC addresses and sends a notification to the supervisor.

Example:

W310-1(super)# mac-address-authorized-list-default allow

Done!

70 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 7

Related Commands:

Use mac-address-authorized-list

command to add or remove a MAC

address from the authorized list of devices. Table can contain up to 10000 entries.

• Use the

show mac address authorized list

command to display a list of authorized MAC addresses and their access settings.

set arp-aging-interval

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set arp-aging interval command to set the aging interval for entries in the

Layer 2 ARP table.

The entry is deleted at the end of every aging interval. The default value is 10 minutes.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set arp-aging-interval <value>

Syntax

<value>

Description

The number of minutes that an entry remains in the ARP cache.

The range is 0 to 10 minutes. 0 disables ARP aging.

Example:

W310-1# set arp-aging-interval 10

ARP table aging interval was set to 10 minutes.

Related Commands:

Use the

show arp-aging-interval

command to display the ARP table aging interval

for table entries.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 71

Chapter 7 Layer 2 Switching Commands

set arp-tx-interval

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set arp-tx-interval command to set the keep-alive frames sending interval.

These keep-alive frames are used to maintain connectivity with silent stations in the network.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set arp-tx-interval <value>

Syntax

<value>

Description

The interval in seconds. The range is 0 to 3600. 0 disables the transmission of the keep-alive frames.

Example:

W310-1# set arp-tx-interval 15

ARP tx interval was set to 15 seconds.

Related Commands:

Use the

show arp-tx-interval

command to display the keep-alive frames

transmission interval.

set mac-aging

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set mac-aging command to enable or disable the MAC aging function.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

Set mac-aging {enable | disable}

72 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 7

Example:

W310-1# set mac-aging enable mac aging is enabled.

W310-1# set mac-aging disable mac aging is disabled.

set mac-aging-time

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set mac-aging-time command to set the MAC aging time in minutes. This is the time after which unused MAC addresses in the MAC table are erased.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set mac-aging-time <aging-time>

Syntax

<aging-time>

Description

Aging time in minutes (1-16666; default =5).

! The entered value is the aging time lower limit. The actual aging time might be up to three minutes longer.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 73

Chapter 7 Layer 2 Switching Commands

Example:

W310-1# set mac-aging-time 5 mac aging time is set to 5 minutes.

set vlan

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set vlan command to configure VLANs. Use the

clear vlan

command to

delete an existing VLAN.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set vlan <vlan-id> [name <vlan-name>]

Syntax

<vlan-id>

<vlan-name>

Description

VLAN number

VLAN name

! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.

Example:

W310-1# set vlan 3 name gregory

VLAN id 3, vlan-name gregory created.

Related Commands:

• Use the

clear vlan

command to delete an existing VLAN.

• Use the

show vlan

command to display the VLANs configured in the switch.

74 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 7

show arp-aging-interval

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show arp-aging-interval command to display the ARP table aging interval for table entries.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show arp-aging-interval

Example:

W310-1> show arp-aging-interval

ARP table aging interval was set to 10 minutes.

Related Commands:

Use the

set arp-aging-interval

command to set the aging interval for entries in the

Layer 2 ARP table.

show arp-tx-interval

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show arp-tx-interval command to display the keep-alive frames transmission interval.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show arp-tx-interval

Example:

W310-1> show arp-tx-interval

ARP tx interval is set to 5 seconds.

Related Commands:

Use the

set arp-tx-interval command to set the keep-alive frames sending interval.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 75

Chapter 7 Layer 2 Switching Commands

show cam

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show cam command to search all entries that match the criteria you specific in the command.

! MACs associated with LAGs appear under the LAG ID, not under the LAG port.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show cam [<module>[/<port>]] show cam mac <mac-addr> [<vlan-id>] show cam vlan <vlan-id> [<module>[/<port>]]

Syntax

[<module>[/

<port>]]

<mac-addr>

<vlan-id>

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.

MAC address to search for.

VLAN ID to search for.

Example: (by MAC address)

W310-1# show cam mac 00-00-81-01-23-45

Dest MAC/Route Destination Ports

-------------- -----------------

00-00-81-01-23-45

00-00-81-01-23-46

1/9

1/9

Total Matching CAM Entries = 2

76 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 7

Example: (by Module/Port)

W310-1> show cam 1/1 show cam 1/1

Dest MAC/Route Dest Destination Ports

------------------- -----------------

00-40-0d-59-03-78 1/1

00-d0-79-0a-0a-da 1/1

00-40-0d-43-1e-e9 1/1

...

00-40-0d-c6-24-01 1/1

Total Matching CAM Entries Displayed = 178

show l2-module-config

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show l2-module-config command to display W310 Layer 2 configuration.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show l2-module-config

! A shortened example is shown below: the full output shows information on all the ports.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 77

Chapter 7 Layer 2 Switching Commands

Example:

W310-1# show l2-module-config

Please be patient.

Gathering and displaying the information might take a while.

W310-1(super)# !#

!# Upload time: Unavailable Unavailable

!# System descrtion: Avaya Inc. - W310

!# Master position: 1

!#

!# Module #: 1

!# Module type, expansion type: P333R-LB

!# Module-CS, expansion-CS: 3.0

!# MAC address: 00-40-0d-b9-89-00

!# Serial #: 4425161

!# SW versions - bank A, B, Boot: 3.12.2 4.0.3 3.3.0

!# Number of ports: 24

!#

!#THERE IS NO LINK AGGREGATION GROUP.

set internal buffering 1 med

!#

!#

78 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 7 set port edge admin state 1/1 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/2 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/3 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/4 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/5 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/6 non-edge-port

--type q to quit or space key to continue-- set port edge admin state 1/7 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/8 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/9 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/10 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/11 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/12 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/13 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/14 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/15 non-edge-port set port edge admin state 1/16 non-edge-port

!#*************** port 1/1 configuration *****************

!# Port type: 10/100Base-T

!# Link status: fail

!# STA status: Blocking

!#********************************************************

--type q to quit or space key to continue--

[Kset port disable 1/1 set port negotiation 1/1 enable set port flowcontrol all 1/1 off set port level 1/1 0 set trunk 1/1 off set port vlan 1 1/1 set port name 1/1 "NO NAME" set port trap 1/1 enable set port classification 1/1 regular set port enable 1/1

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 79

Chapter 7 Layer 2 Switching Commands

!#*************** port 1/2 configuration *****************

!# Port type: 10/100Base-T

!# Link status: fail

!# STA status: Blocking

!#******************************************************** set port disable 1/2 set port negotiation 1/2 enable set port flowcontrol all 1/2 off set port level 1/2 0 set trunk 1/2 off set port vlan 1 1/2 set port name 1/2 "NO NAME" set port trap 1/2 enable

--type q to quit or space key to continue-- set port classification 1/2 regular set port enable 1/2

!#*************** port 1/3 configuration *****************

!# Port type: 10/100Base-T

!# Link status: fail

!# STA status: Blocking

!#******************************************************** set port disable 1/3 set port negotiation 1/3 enable set port flowcontrol all 1/3 off set port level 1/3 0 set trunk 1/3 off set port vlan 1 1/3 set port name 1/3 "NO NAME" set port trap 1/3 enable set port classification 1/3 regular set port enable 1/3

...

80 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 7

!#Set vlan table management parameters

!# set port vlan-binding-mode 1/1 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/2 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/3 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/4 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/5 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/6 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/7 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/8 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/9 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/10 static

--type q to quit or space key to continue-- set port vlan-binding-mode 1/11 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/12 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/13 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/14 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/15 static set port vlan-binding-mode 1/16 static

...

show l2-stack-config

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show l2-stack-config command to display Layer 2 stack configuration.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show l2-stack-config

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 81

Chapter 7 Layer 2 Switching Commands

Example:

W310-1> show l2-stack-config

!#

!# Upload time: Unavailable Unavailable

!# System description: Avaya Inc. - W310

!# IP address, netmask: 149.49.32.134 255.255.255.0

!# Master position: 1

!# Number of modules: 1

!# set spantree disable set intermodule port redundancy 1/1 1/2 on gregory set arp-tx-interval 0 set logging file enable set time client disable set time server 0.0.0.0

set logout 0 hostname "W310"

!#

!# End of Configuration File

show mac address authorized list

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the show mac address authorized list command to display a list of authorized MAC addresses and their access settings. This table displays up to 16 entries.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show mac address authorized list

82 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 7

Example:

W310-1(super)# show mac address authorized list

Display 1 rows

MAC Address Access

--------------- -----------------

00.04.d0.af.12.04 deny

Related Commands:

Use mac-address-authorized-list

command to add or remove a MAC

address from the authorized list of devices.

• Use the

mac-address-authorized-list-default

to set the default access type for MAC addresses in the authorized list.

show mac-aging

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show mac-aging command to display the current status of the MAC aging function.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show mac-aging

Example:

W310-1> show mac-aging mac aging application is disabled

Related Commands:

• Use the

set mac-aging

command to enable or disable the MAC aging function.

• Use the

set mac-aging-time

command to set the MAC aging time in minutes.

• Use the

show mac-aging-time

command to display the MAC aging time in minutes.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 83

Chapter 7 Layer 2 Switching Commands

show mac-aging-time

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show mac-aging-time command to display the MAC aging time in minutes.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show mac-aging-time

! The displayed value is the aging time lower limit. The actual aging time can be up to 2 minutes longer.

Example:

W310-1> show mac-aging-time

MAC aging time is 5 (min.)

Related Commands:

• Use the

set mac-aging

command to enable or disable the MAC aging function.

• Use the

set mac-aging-time

command to set the MAC aging time in minutes.

• Use the

show mac-aging

command to display the current status of the MAC aging

function.

show vlan

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show vlan command to display the VLANs configured in the switch.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show vlan

84 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Example:

W310-1> show vlan

VLAN ID Vlan-name

------- --------------------------------

1 v1

5 V5

10 V10

15 V15

20 V20

25 V25

Related Commands:

• Use the

clear vlan

command to delete an existing VLAN.

• Use the

set vlan

command to configure VLANs.

Chapter 7

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 85

Chapter 7 Layer 2 Switching Commands

86 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

LAP and Radio Card Commands

This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure the light access points

(LAPs) and LAP Radio Cards connected to the W310:

apply-template

assoc-response-timeout

automatic-channel-selection-band

beacon-period

change-lap-name

channel-frequency

clear statistics

copy tftp LAP_image

disable-lap

dtim-period

fragmentation-threshold

lap

lap-base-ip-address

lap-location

lap-template

lb-adj-ap-time-difference

lb-mode

lb-tx-time

long-retry-limit

max-rx-lifetime

max-tx-msdu-lifetime

multicast-tx-rate

operational-mode

power-up-lap

radio-card-802.11

radio-card-template

reboot-lap

restore-lap-to-template

restore-to-factory-default

rogue-ap-authorized-mac-list

rogue-ap-interval

rogue-ap

rts-threshold

set LAP boot bank

short-slot-time-implemented

short-slot-time-status

show lap parameters

show rogue ap authorized mac list

show template parameters

spectralink-compatible-phone

ssid

tx-power-level

unicast-tx-rate

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 87

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

apply-template

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Root, Lap-template

Use the apply-template command to apply a template with the current configuration to a radio card.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: apply-template

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Example:

W310-1# apply-template

Done!

88 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

assoc-response-timeout

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the assoc-response-timeout command to specify the number of time units

(TU) an associated station should wait for a transmitted association request MAC

Management PDU (MMPDU). If the association does not occur during the specified timeout period, then it is assumed that the association failed. Use the [no] form of this command to reset the transmitted association request period to its default.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] assoc-response-timeout <timeout>

Syntax

timeout

Description

Number of time units. The range is 1 to 4294967294.

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Example:

To set the transmitted association request period:

(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# assoc-response-

timeout 2

Done!

To return to the default transmitted association request period:

(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no assoc-response-

timeout

Done!

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 89

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

automatic-channel-selection-band

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the automatic-channel-selection-allowed-band command to configure the frequency bands that the automatic channel selection feature will scan through.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: automatic-channel-selection-band <lower-middle | lowermiddle-high>

Syntax

lower-middle | lower-middle-high

Description

The following lists the bands and channels for each selection:

lower-middle - U-NII Lower Band equals 5.15 to 5.25 GHz

(channels 36, 40, 44, 48), and, U-NII Middle Band equals 5.25 to

5.35 GHz (channels 52, 56, 60, 64)

lower-middle-high - U-NII Lower Band equals 5.15 to 5.25

GHz (channels 36, 40, 44, 48), U-NII Middle Band equals 5.25 to 5.35 GHz (channels 52, 56, 60, 64), U-NII High Band equals

5.725 to 5.825 GHz (channels 149, 153, 157, 161)

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Example:

To set the automatic channel selection allowed band:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# automatic-

channel-selection-band lower-middle

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

90 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

beacon-period

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the beacon-period command to specify the number of time units (TU) that a station

(AP) will use for scheduling beacon transmissions. Use the [no] form of this command to return the beacon period to its default value of 12.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] beacon-period <period>

Syntax

<period>

Description

Number of TUs a station will use to schedule beacon transmissions. This value is transmitted in beacon and probe response frames. The range is 1 to 65535. The default setting is

12.

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Example:

To set the beacon period:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# beacon-period

900

Done!

To return to the default unicast transmission rate:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no beacon-

period

Done!

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 91

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

change-lap-name

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: LAP

Use the change-lap-name command to change the existing LAP name to a new one. See

show lap parameters

for <name>. The name must be unique.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: lap-change-name <name>

Syntax

<name>

Description

New LAP name that you want to use. The name must be unique.

Example:

W310-1(super/port 01)# change-lap-name lobby

Done!

W310-1(super/lobby)#

92 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

channel-frequency

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the channel-frequency command to specify the current frequency channel for

802.11a only. The following chart shows the range of channels for 802.11a. There are five sets of frequency bands that determine the available channels depending on the regulatory domain. Some countries restrict 802.11a operation to specific frequency bands.

Allowable Channels for 802.11a/b/g Table:

Regulatory

Domain or

Country Code

Frequency

Bands

Allowed

Channels

USA (FCC) L, M, U,

ISM

In 802.11a mode: 36, 40,

36 - 5.18 GHz

40 - 5.20 GHz

44, 48, 52, 56, 44 - 5.22 GHz

60, 64, 149, 153, 48 - 5.24 GHz

157, 161, 165 52 - 5.26 GHz

56 - 5.28 GHz

In 802.11b/g mode: 1 - 11

60 - 5.30 GHz

64 - 5.32 GHz

149 - 5.745 GHz

153 - 5.765 GHz

157 - 5.785 GHz

161 - 5.805 GHz

165 - 5.825 GHz

Europe (ETSI) L and M In 802.11a mode: 36, 40,

44, 48, 52, 56,

60, 64

In 802.11b/g modes: 1 - 13

36 - 5.18 GHz

40 - 5.20 GHz

44 - 5.22 GHz

48 - 5.24 GHz

52 - 5.26 GHz

56 - 5.28 GHz

60 - 5.30 GHz

64 - 5.32 GHz

1 - 2.412 GHz

2 - 2.417 GHz

3 - 2.422 GHz

4 - 2.427 GHz

5 - 2.432 GHz

6 - 2.437 GHz

7 - 2.442 GHz

8 - 2.447 GHz

9 - 2.452 GHz

10 - 2.457 GHz

11 - 2.462 GHz

1 - 2.412 GHz

2 - 2.417 GHz

3 - 2.422 GHz

4 - 2.427 GHz

5 - 2.432 GHz

6 - 2.437 GHz

7 - 2.442 GHz

8 - 2.447 GHz

9 - 2.452 GHz

10 - 2.457 GHz

11 - 2.462 GHz

12 - 2.467 GHz

13 - 2.472 GHz

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 93

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

Regulatory

Domain or Country

Code

Frequency

Bands

Japan (TELEC) L

Allowed

Channels

In 802.11a mode: 34, 38,

42, 46

In 802.11b mode: 1 - 14

In 802.11g mode: 1 - 13

In 802.11b/g mode: 1 - 13

34 - 5.17 GHz

38 - 5.19 GHz

42 - 5.21 GHz

46 - 5.23 GHz

Singapore (IDA) L, U, and

ISM

In 802.11a mode: 36, 40,

36 - 5.18 GHz

40 - 5.20 GHz

44, 48, 149, 153, 44 - 5.22 GHz

157, 161, 165 48 - 5.24 GHz

149 - 5.745 GHz

In 802.11b/g modes: 1 - 13

153 - 5.765 GHz

157 - 5.785 GHz

161 - 5.805 GHz

Asia U 149 - 5.745 GHz mode: 149, 153,

157, 161

153 - 5.765 GHz

157 - 5.785 GHz

161 - 5.805 GHz

In 802.11b/g modes: 1 - 13

1 - 2.412 GHz

2 - 2.417 GHz

3 - 2.422 GHz

4 - 2.427 GHz

5 - 2.432 GHz

6 - 2.437 GHz

7 - 2.442 GHz

8 - 2.447 GHz

9 - 2.452 GHz

10 - 2.457 GHz

11 - 2.462 GHz

12 - 2.467 GHz

13 - 2.472 GHz

1 - 2.412 GHz

2 - 2.417 GHz

3 - 2.422 GHz

4 - 2.427 GHz

5 - 2.432 GHz

6 - 2.437 GHz

7 - 2.442 GHz

8 - 2.447 GHz

9 - 2.452 GHz

10 - 2.457 GHz

11 - 2.462 GHz

12 - 2.467 GHz

13 - 2.472 GHz

1 - 2.412 GHz

2 - 2.417 GHz

3 - 2.422 GHz

4 - 2.427 GHz

5 - 2.432 GHz

6 - 2.437 GHz

7 - 2.442 GHz

8 - 2.447 GHz

9 - 2.452 GHz

10 - 2.457 GHz

11 - 2.462 GHz 12 -

2.467 GHz

13 - 2.472 GHz

1 - 2.412 GHz

2 - 2.417 GHz

3 - 2.422 GHz

4 - 2.427 GHz

5 - 2.432 GHz

6 - 2.437 GHz

7 - 2.442 GHz

8 - 2.447 GHz

9 - 2.452 GHz

10 - 2.457 GHz

11 - 2.462 GHz

12 - 2.467 GHz

13 - 2.472 GHz

14 - 2.477 GHz

1 - 2.412 GHz

2 - 2.417 GHz

3 - 2.422 GHz

4 - 2.427 GHz

5 - 2.432 GHz

6 - 2.437 GHz

7 - 2.442 GHz

8 - 2.447 GHz

9 - 2.452 GHz

10 - 2.457 GHz

11 - 2.462 GHz

12 - 2.467 GHz

13 - 2.472 GHz

94 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

Regulatory

Domain or Country

Code

Frequency

Bands

Allowed

Channels

Taiwan (TW) M, U, and ISM In 802.11a mode: 56, 60,

64, 149, 153,

157, 161, 165

In 802.11b/g modes: 1 - 11

56 - 5.28 GHz

60 - 5.30 GHz

64 - 5.32 GHz

149 - 5.745 GHz

153 - 5.765 GHz

157 - 5.785 GHz

161 - 5.805 GHz

165 - 5.825 GHz

1 - 2.412 GHz

2 - 2.417 GHz

3 - 2.422 GHz

4 - 2.427 GHz

5 - 2.432 GHz

6 - 2.437 GHz

7 - 2.442 GHz

8 - 2.447 GHz

9 - 2.452 GHz

10 - 2.457 GHz

11 - 2.462 GHz

Frequency Band Table

Frequency

Band

Lower Band

(36 = default)

Middle Band

(52 = default)

H Band

Channel

ID

60

100

104

108

48

52

56

58

40

42

44

46

34

36

38

128

132

136

140

112

116

120

124

FCC

(GHz)

5.240

5.260

5.280

5.300

5.320

5.180

5.200

5.220

ETSI

(GHz)

5.240

5.260

5.280

5.300

5.320

5.500

5.520

5.540

5.180

5.200

5.220

5.560

5.580

5.600

5.620

5.640

5.660

5.680

5.700

5.230

MKK

(GHz)

5.170

1

5.190

5.210

SG

(GHz)

5.240

5.180

5.200

5.220

TW

(GHz)

5.260

5.280

5.300

5.320

ASIA

(GHz)

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 95

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

Frequency

Band

Channel

ID

FCC

(GHz)

ETSI

(GHz)

MKK

(GHz)

SG

(GHz)

ASIA

(GHz)

TW

(GHz)

Upper Band

(149 = default)

149

153

157

161

5.745

5.675

5.785

5.805

ISM Band

165 5.825

Note 1: Channel 34 is the default channel for Japan

5.745

5.675

5.785

5.805

5.825

5.745

5.675

5.785

5.805

5.745

5.675

5.785

5.805

5.825

Use the [no] form of this command to reset the current 802.11a frequency channel to its default.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] channel-frequency

<index>

Syntax

<index>

Description

Current operating frequency channel. Valid channels are shown in the tables above.

• 802.11a default: Channel 48

• 802.11bg default: Channel 3

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

96 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

Example:

To set the current 802.11a frequency channel, specify the channel number (use the table above for assistance):

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# channel-

frequency 36

Done!

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)#

To return to the default 802.11a frequency channel:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no channel-

frequency

Done!

channel-selection

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Context: Radio card, Template

Use the channel-selection command to enable or disable the automatic frequency channel feature for the wireless interface. When enabled, you cannot set the frequency channel. The default is enabled. Use the [no] form of this command to return to the default value of enabled.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] channel-selection <auto | selective>

Syntax

auto selective

Description

Selects the channel frequency for the LAP automatically.

Lets you select the channel frequency for the LAP. After you use this command, you must use the channel-frequency command to select the channel.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 97

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP will need to reboot in order for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Example:

To enable automatic channel selection:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# channelselection auto

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y

To disable automatic channel selection:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# channelselection selective

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y

Done!

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# channelfrequency 1

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y

clear statistics

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: LAP, Radio card

Use the clear statistics command to clear all the Light Access Point (LAP’s) general radio counters/statistics. This includes the following:

• Number of Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) errors

• Number of successfully transmitted MAC Protocol Data Units (MPDUs) belonging to a fragmented MAC Service Data Unit (MSDU)

• Number of MPDUs received that belong to a fragmented MSDU

• Number of successfully transmitted multicast MSDUs

• Number of multicast MSDUs received

• Number of failed transmitted MSDUs because the number of retries reached its limit

98 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

• Number of MSDUs successfully transmitted with more than one or more retry attempts

• Number of duplicate frames received

• Number of Request To Send (RTS) were transmitted without a Clear To Send (CTS) response

• Number of transmission attempts that ended without an ACK (acknowledgement)

• Number of Frame Check Sequence (FCS) errors detected

• Number of successfully transmitted MSDUs

• Number of received MSDUs

• Number of decryption errors

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: clear-statistics [general-radio-statistics]

Syntax

[general-radiostatistics]

Description

The specific LAP counter or statistic that you want to clear.

If you do not specify a counter or statistic, all of the statistics listed above are cleared.

Example:

To clear all counters and statistics:

W310-1(super)#clear-statistics

Done!

To clear a specific counter or statistic:

W310-1(super)#clear-statistics decryption-failed-counter

Done!

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 99

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

copy tftp LAP_image

Use the copy tftp LAP_image command to download the Light Access Point (LAP) image to the W310.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: copy tftp LAP_image <filename> <bank_value>

Syntax

<filename>

<bank_value>

Description

Filename of the LAP image.

Set to either bank-A or bank-B.

Example:

W310-1(super)#copy tftp LAP_image AP600 c:\lap_image01

149.49.66.17 bank-a

Beginning download operation ...

This operation may take a few minutes...

Please refrain from any other operation during this time.

For more information, use 'show tftp download software status' command.

disable-lap

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the disable-lap command to shut down the power to all LAPs or a specified LAP.

Syntax:

disable-lap {all | <name>

}

100

Syntax

all

<name>

Description

Shuts down the power to all LAPs in the domain.

Shuts down the power for the specified LAP. The LAP name is the assigned Network Name.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Example:

W310-1(super)# disable-lap all

This command will shutdown the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

dtim-period

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the dtim-period command to specify the number of beacon intervals that will elapse between transmission of beacon frames containing a Traffic Indicator Message (TIM) element whose Delivery Traffic Indicator Message (DTIM) count field is 0.

Use the [no] form of this command to reset the DTIM period to its default.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] dtim-period <period>

Syntax

<period>

Description

Number of beacon intervals. The range is 1 to 255 intervals. The default value is 1.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 101

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Example:

To set the number of DTIM periods:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# dtim-period 3

Done!

To return to the default DTIM periods:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no dtim-period

Done!

fragmentation-threshold

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the fragmentation-threshold command to set the fragmentation threshold for

MAC Service Data Units (MSDUs).

When transmitting a packet over a wireless network, sometimes the packet is broken into several segments, if the size of packet exceeds that allowed by the network. The

fragmentation threshold defines the number of bytes used for the fragmentation boundary for directed messages. Fragmentation threshold increases the transfer reliability by cutting a

MAC Service Data Unit (MSDU) into smaller size MAC Protocol Data Units (MPDU). For this command, specify the MPDU maximum size, in octets, that may be delivered to the

PHY. An MSDU is broken into fragments if its size exceeds this attribute’s value after adding MAC headers and trailers.

Use the [no] form of this command to set the fragmentation threshold to its default.

102 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] fragmentation-threshold <threshold>

Syntax

<threshold>

Description

Size of the fragmentation threshold. The default value is 2346.

The range for this value is 256 to 2346.

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Example:

To set the fragmentation threshold:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# fragmentation-

threshold 280

Done!

To return to the default fragmentation threshold:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no

fragmentation-threshold

Done!

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 103

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

lap

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Root

Use the lap command to enter the LAP command mode so that you can configure the specified LAP. LAP is associated with the W310 port.

Warning: You must enter the name with the word port- and the port number. For example, the W110 connected to port 15 on the W310 would be port-15 as the LAP name.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: lap <lap-name>

Syntax

<lap-name>

Description

LAP name for the LAP that you want to configure.

Example:

W310-1(super)# lap port-01

W310-1(super/LAP port-01)#

104 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

lap-base-ip-address

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Root

Use the lap-base-ip-address command to change the LAP’s IP address if your subnet uses a 13.13.13.x subnet.

Caution: This command is only used when you have a 13.13.13.x subnet. You must only use this command when this conflict occurs.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: lap-base-ip-address <ip-address>

Syntax

<ip-address>

Description

Current LAP location or the new LAP location.

Example:

W310-1(super)# lap-base-ip-address 1.1.1.0

You should copy running configuration to startup and reset the module in order that the change become effective.

Done!

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 105

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

lap-location

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: LAP

Use the lap-location command to set or change the LAP location. Refer to show-lap

parameters for the name parameter. The name must be unique.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: lap-location <location>

Syntax

<location>

Description

Current LAP location or the new LAP location.

Example:

W310-1(super)# lap-location 23rdfloor

Done!

lap-template

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Root

Use the lap-template command to enter the LAP template configuration mode. Makes it possible for you to apply a template to the specified LAP.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: lap-template <name>

Syntax

<name>

Description

LAP name to which you want to apply the default template. For a list of LAPs, use the show-lap command. The name is up to

32 characters. The default lap template name is Default.

106 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

Example:

W310-1(super)# lap-template marketing

W310-1(super/802.1 marketing template)#

Related Commands:

apply-template applies the template file for a specific configuration to the LAP.

lb-adj-ap-time-difference

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the lb-adj-ap-time-difference command to set the load balancing maximum allowed processing time difference between adjacent AP’s packet transmissions. Use the

[no] form of this command to restore the default value.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] lb-adj-ap-time-difference <threshold>

Syntax

<threshold>

Description

Set the maximum allowed transmission processing time between

APs. The range is 100 to 1000000 milliseconds. The default value is 1000000.

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 107

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

Example:

To set the maximum allowed difference for transmission processing time between adjacent

APs to a value other than the default:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# lb-adj-ap-

time-difference 200

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y

To return to the default value of 100 milliseconds:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no lb-adj-ap-

time-difference

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y

lb-mode

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the lb-mode command to enable or disable load balancing. Load balancing is used in radio wireless LANs to prevent any one Access Point from becoming responsible for too much network traffic. When multiple Access Points are installed and several nodes are competing to send data to them, load balancing ensures that all of the Access Points work together to move the data across the wireless LAN. The default value is disabled.

Use the [no] form of this command to return to its default value of enabled.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: lb-mode <active | not-active>

Syntax

<active>

<not-active>

Description

Enables load balancing for the Access Point interface.

Disables load balancing for the Access Point interface.

108 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Example:

To send the SSID attributes to a LAP:

W310-1(super)# lb-mode active

The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

To return the LAP to the default SSID attributes:

W310-1(super)# no lb-mode

The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

lb-tx-time

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the lb-tx-time command to set the maximum allowed processing time to transmit packets. This is measured from the time a packet enters an Access Point from the W310 until it successfully exits the AP’s radio.

Use the [no] form of this command to return to the default value of 1000000.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] lb-tx-time <threshold>

Syntax

<threshold>

Description

Set the maximum allowed transmission processing time in milliseconds. The range is 100 to 1000000 milliseconds. The default value is 1000000.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 109

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Example:

To set the load balancing maximum allowed transmission processing time to a value other than the default:

W310-1(super)# lb-tx-time 900

The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

To restore the default value of 100 for the load balancing maximum allowed transmission processing time:

W310-1(super)# no lb-tx-time

The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

long-retry-limit

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the long-retry-limit command to specify the maximum number of transmission attempts that will be made by a frame before a failure is indicated. This setting is for frames that are greater than the RTS threshold number of bytes.

Use the [no] form of this command to reset the long retry limit to its default.

110 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] long-retry-limit <limit>

Syntax

<limit>

Description

Maximum number of attempts to be made in time units (TU).

The range is 1 through 4294967295. The default value is 4.

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Example:

To set the long retry limit:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# long-retry-

limit 50

The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

To restore the default long retry limit:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no long-retry-

limit

The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 111

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

max-rx-lifetime

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the max-rx-lifetime command to specify the elapsed time in time units (TU) after the initial receipt of a fragmented MAC Management Protocol Data Unit (MMPDU) or

MAC Service Data Unit (MSDU) that will terminate any further attempt to reassemble the

MMPDU or MSDU.

Use the [no] form of this command to reset the elapsed time to its default.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] max-rx-lifetime

<time>

Syntax

<time>

Description

Elapsed time in time units. The default is 256. The range for this value is 1 through 4294967295.

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Example:

To set the maximum elapsed time:

CW310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# max-rx-

lifetime 200

The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

112 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

To restore the default maximum elapsed time:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no max-rx-

lifetime

The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Chapter 8

Done!

max-tx-msdu-lifetime

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the max-tx-msdu-lifetime command to specify the elapsed time in time units

(TU) after the first MAC Service Data Unit (MSDU) transmission attempt that will result in the termination of further MSDU retransmission attempts.

Use the [no] form of this command to reset the elapsed time to its default.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] max-tx-msdu-lifetime

<time>

Syntax

<time>

Description

Maximum MSDU transmission time in time units. The default is

512. The range for this value is 1 through 4294967295 time units.

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 113

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

Example:

To set the maximum MSDU transmission time:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# max-tx-msdu-

lifetime 200

The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

To restore the default maximum MSDU transmission time:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no max-tx-

msdu-lifetime

The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

multicast-tx-rate

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the multicast-tx-rate command to set the multicast rate for the network interface card. This command is dependent on the type of wireless network interface card

(NIC), including 802.11a, 802.11b, or 802.11g. This command is used for beacons, frames used for Clear To Send (CTS), and other multicast and broadcast frames. Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default value.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] multicast-tx-rate <rate>

114 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

Syntax

<rate>

Description

The multicast rate. Applicable rates (in megabytes) are as follows:

802.11a: 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 36, 48, 54

802.11b: 1, 2, 5.5, 11 (2 is the default)

When the distance between APs is set to small, minicell, or

microcell, the multicast rates can be set to:

22 for 11 Mbit/s

11 for 5.5 Mbit/s

4 for 2 Mbit/s

2 for 1 Mbit

When the distance between APs is set to medium, the multicast rates can be set to:

11 for 5.5 Mbit/s

4 for 2 Mbit/s

2 for 1 Mbit

When the distance between APs is set to large, the multicast rates can be set to:

4 for 2 Mbit/s

2 for 1 Mbit

802.11b/g: 1, 2, 5.5, 6, 9, 11, 12 18, 24, 36, 48, 54

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Example:

To set the multicast rate to another value:

W310-1(super)# multicast-tx-rate 11

The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 115

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

To return to the default value of 2 Mbit/s per second (4):

W310-1(super)# no multicast-tx-rate

The command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

operational-mode

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Root, LAP

Use the operational-mode command to configure the operation mode for the wireless network interface.

Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default value.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] operational-mode {802.11b | 802.11bg | 802.11a | 802.11g}

Syntax

{802.11b |

802.11bg |

802.11a |

802.11g}

Description

Operation mode for the wireless network interface cards.

• 802.11a (default)

• 802.11b

• 802.11bg

• 802.11g

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

116 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

Example:

To set the operational mode:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# operational-

mode 802.11a

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y

power-up-lap

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Root

Use the power-up-lap command to power up the Light Access Point(s) (LAP(s)) by turning on the power to all the LAPs or a specified LAP.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: power-up-lap <all | <name>}

Syntax

all

<name>

Description

Powers up all LAPs in your domain.

Name of the LAP you want to power up. The LAP name is the assigned Network Name.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 117

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

Example:

W310-1(super)# power-up-lap all

Load detection process on port 1 is enabled.

Load detection process on port 2 is enabled.

Load detection process on port 3 is enabled.

Load detection process on port 4 is enabled.

Load detection process on port 5 is enabled.

Load detection process on port 6 is enabled.

Load detection process on port 7 is enabled.

Load detection process on port 8 is enabled.

Load detection process on port 9 is enabled.

Load detection process on port 10 is enabled.

Load detection process on port 11 is enabled.

Load detection process on port 12 is enabled.

Load detection process on port 13 is enabled.

Load detection process on port 14 is enabled.

Load detection process on port 15 is enabled.

Load detection process on port 16 is enabled.

Done!

118 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

radio-card-802.11

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: LAP

Use the radio-card-802.11 command to enter the 802.11-radio card command mode.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: radio-card-802.11 <type> <location>

Syntax

<type>

<location>

Description

Specify the radio card type as:

802.11a for 802.11a

802.11g for 802.11g

The card slot on the AP:

• first-slot

• second-slot

Example:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby)# radio-card-802.11 802.11a first-

slot

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 119

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

radio-card-template

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Lap-template

Use the radio-card-template command to enter the radio card template command mode. The radio card types are 802.11a and 802.11g.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: radio-card-template <type>

Syntax

<type>

Description

Specify the radio card type as:

a for 802.11a

g for 802.11g

Example:

Enter the radio card template from the LAP template as follows:

W310-1 (super/802.1 default template)# radio-card-802.11

802.11g

W310-1 (super/802.1 default template/802.11g) #

120 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

reboot-lap

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the reboot-lap command to reboot the Light Access Point LAP(s) by shutting down the power to the LAP(s) and turning the power back on. You can reset all the LAPs in your domain or specify a LAP to reboot. The LAP will maintain its configuration.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: reboot-lap all | <lap_name>}

Syntax

all

<lap_name>

Description

Reboots all the LAPs in your domain.

Name of the LAP you want to reboot. The name must be the

LAP’s assigned Network Name.

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 121

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

Example:

W310-1(super)# reboot-lap all

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y

Reboot LAP connected to port 1

Reboot LAP connected to port 2

LAP isn’t connected to port 3

LAP isn’t connected to port 4

Reboot LAP connected to port 5

Reboot LAP connected to port 6

LAP isn’t connected to port 7

LAP isn’t connected to port 8

....

restore-lap-to-template

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Root, LAP

Use the restore-lap-to-template command to restore the LAP or LAPs to the default template attributes. You can restore all the LAPs in your domain or restore only the

LAP for the LAP mode you are in.

Warning: You will lose the configuration information currently stored on the LAP(s) if you use this command.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: restore-lap-to-template <all>

Syntax

all

Description

Restores all the Light Access Points in your domain to the default template attributes.

122 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Example:

To restore all LAPs to the template:

W310-1(super)# restore-lap-to-template all

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y

Example:

To restore a specific LAP, you must be in the LAP’s mode.

W310-1(super)# lap port-01

W310-1(super/lap port-01)# restore-lap-to-template

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y

restore-to-factory-default

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Lap Template

Use the restore-to-factory-default command to restore the template to the factory default settings and reset all LAPs. This restores all devices to the factory default template.

Warning: You will lose the configuration information currently stored on the LAP if you use this command.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: restore-to-factory-default

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 123

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Example:

W310-1(super/802.1 default template)# restore-lap-factory-

default

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y

rogue-ap

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the rogue-ap-status command to enable or disable the rogue Access Point detection service in the device. Use of [no] form of this command to return to the default of disabled.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] rogue-ap <active | not-active>

Syntax

<active>

<not-active>

Description

Enables rogue Access Point detection.

Disables rogue Access Point detection.

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

124 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

Example:

To enable the rogue AP status detection service:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# rogue-ap

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue?

Done!

Related Commands:

• rogue-ap-interval sets the interval at which the rogue Access Point detection feature will initialize.

• rogue-ap-authorized-mac-list lets you view, add or remove the MAC address for a valid Access Point MAC list.

rogue-ap-authorized-mac-list

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use rogue-ap-authorized-mac-list command to add or remove a Media Access

Control (MAC) address to or from the valid rogue Access Point (AP) MAC list. A rogue AP is an unauthorized AP within a given coverage area.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: rogue-ap-authorized-mac-list add | remove <mac-address>

Syntax

add | remove

<mac-address>

Description

Add or remove the specified AP MAC address. Table may contain up to 10000 entries.

Specific MAC address for the Access Point you want to add or remove from the authorized list.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 125

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

Example:

W310-1# rogue-ap-valid-mac-list add 00:04:d0:af:bb:1e

Done!

W310-1#

Related Commands:

Use the

show rogue ap authorized mac list to display the list of authorized

APs by their MAC addresses.

rogue-ap-interval

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the rogue-ap-interval command to set the interval at which the rogue Access

Point (AP) detection feature initializes. APs are then scanned at the specified interval.

Use the [no] form of this command to return to its default value.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] rogue-ap-interval <interval>

Syntax

<interval>

Description

Interval in seconds that the APs are scanned. The range is from

15 to 1440 seconds. The default value is 15 seconds.

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

126 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

Example:

To set the rogue AP interval:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# rogue-ap-

interval 900

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

To restore the default of 15 seconds for the rogue AP interval:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no rogue-ap-

interval

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 127

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

rts-threshold

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the rts-threshold to specify the packet size of a Request To Send (RTS) transmission. This setting helps control traffic flow through an Access Point, especially one with many clients.

Specify the number of bytes in an MAC Protocol Data Units (MPDU) below which an RTS/

CTS handshake will not be performed.

Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default RTS threshold.

Syntax:

[no] rts-threshold <threshold>

Syntax

<threshold>

Description

Number of bytes. The default value is 2347.

• If this value is set to 0 (zero), then RTS/CTS handshake is turned on for all data and management frames transmitted by the station.

• If this value is set to a number greater than 2347, then RTS/

CTS handshake is turned off for all data and management frames transmitted by the station.

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

128 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

Example:

To set the RTS threshold:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# rts-threshold

100

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

To return to the default setting:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no rts-

threshold

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

set LAP boot bank

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Root

Use the set LAP boot bank command to set the LAP boot bank from which the system boots.

Syntax:

set LAP boot bank <platform> bank-A | bank-B | auto

Syntax

<platform> bank-A bank-B auto

Description

Use LAP for platform.

Boot bank from which to boot up the system.

System automatically selects the boot bank from which to boot up the system. This is the default.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 129

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

Example:

W310-1(super)# set LAP boot bank bank-B

Done!

short-retry-limit

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the short-retry-limit command to specify the maximum number of transmission attempts that will be made for a frame before a failure is indicated. This setting is for frames that are less than or equal to the Request To Send (RTS) threshold number of bytes.

Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default short retry limit.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] short-retry-limit <limit>

Syntax

<limit>

Description

Maximum number of attempts to be made. The default value is

7. The range is 1 through 255.

130

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Example:

To set the short retry limit:

W310-1 (super/LAP lobby/802.11g first-slot)# short-retry-

limit 100

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue? (Y/N)

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

To restore the default value for short retry limit:

W310-1 (super/LAP lobby/802.11g first-slot)# no short-

retry-limit

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue? (Y/N)

Chapter 8

short-slot-time-implemented

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the short-slot-time-implemented command to enable or disable the Short

Slot Time option. The short-slot-time option is used with 802.11g radio cards only and allows you to maximize throughput. Radio cards in a mixed mode (such as 802.11b/g) cannot use the short slot time. The default is disabled.

Use the [no] form of this command to reset the short slot time to its default.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] short-slot-time-implemented <active | not-active>

Syntax

<active>

<not-active>

Description

Enables the short slot time option for the 802.11g interface.

Disables the short slot time option for the 802.11g interface.

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 131

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

Example:

To implement the short time slot:

W310-1 (super/LAP lobby/802.11g first-slot)# short-slot-

time-implemented active

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue? (Y/N)

To restore the default setting which does not implement a short slot time:

W310-1 (super/LAP lobby/802.11g first-slot)# no short-slot-

time-implemented

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue? (Y/N)

short-slot-time-status

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the short-slot-time-status command to indicate whether the Short Slot Time status is enabled. The default is disabled.

Use the [no] form of this command restores the default short slot time status.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] short-slot-time-status

Syntax

<active>

<not-active>

Description

Enables the short slot time status for the LAP interface.

Disables the short slot time status for the LAP interface.

132

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

Example:

To enable the short slot time status:

W310-1 (super/LAP lobby/802.11g first-slot)# short-slot-

time-status active

Done!

To restore the default short slot time status of disabled:

W310-1 (super/LAP lobby/802.11g first-slot)# no short-slot-

time-status

Done!

show lap parameters

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Root, LAP, Radio Card, Template

Use the show lap parameters command to display the Light Access Point (LAP) parameters for the W310 port. Displays the LAP parameters, including the following.

• LAP name

• Location

• Description

• Current Up Time for the LAP

• Physical port number

• LAP hardware version.

• LAP software image version

• LAP bootloader version

• Upgrade to bootloader version

• MAC address

• AP group name, and

• LAP details that include the following.

— LAP name

— LAP location

— LAP’s SpectraLink Voice over IP (VoIP) status

— Emergency location identification number

— LAP Radio card type and location

— General radio statistics

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 133

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show-lap-parameters [<name>] [details]

Syntax

[<name>]

[details]

Description

Name assigned to the LAP.

Details for the LAP parameters.

Example:

W310-1 (super) # show-lap-parameters show lap parameters

LAP's General Attributes:

Lap Name port-01

Lap Description Avaya Wireless Light AP

Lap Location N/A

Physical Port Number 1

Hardware Version N/A

Software Image Version N/A

Original Boot Loader Version N/A

Upgrade Boot Loader Version N/A

Up Time N/A

Current Operational Mode 802.11a

LAP's General Attributes:

Lap Name port-02

Lap Description Avaya Wireless Light AP

Lap Location N/A

Physical Port Number 2

Hardware Version 58.0.0

Software Image Version 1.1.12

Original Boot Loader Version 1.1.1

Upgrade Boot Loader Version 255.255.255

Up Time 50264230

Current Operational Mode 802.11a

.........

134 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

show rogue ap authorized mac list

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the show rogue ap authorized-mac-list to display the list of authorized

APs by their MAC addresses.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show rogue ap authorized mac list

Example:

W310-1(super)# show rogue ap authorized mac list

Display 2 rows

MAC Address

-------------------

00:03:e1:af:bb:1e

00:03:e2:ae:bc:1f

W310-1(super)#

Related Commands:

Use rogue-ap-authorized-mac-list

command to add or remove a Media Access

Control (MAC) address to or from the valid rogue Access Point (AP) MAC list.

show template parameters

Use the show template parameters command to display the template parameters and attributes.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show template parameters

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 135

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

Example:

W310-1(super)# show template parameters

Current operational mode 802.11g

Template's Parameters

----------------------------------------------------------

802.11a 802.11g

---------------------------------------------------------channel-selection auto auto channel-frequency ACS ACS automatic-channel-selection-band low-mid low-mid tx-power-level 10000 10000 short-slot-time-implemented N/A enable short-slot-time-status N/A disable multicast-tx-rate 0 0 rogue-ap-status disable disable rogue-ap-interval 7200 7200 lb-mode enable enable lb-tx-time 1000000 1000000 lb-adj-ap-time-difference 100 100 assoc-response-timeout 0 0 dtim-period 1 1 beacon-period 100 100

--type q to quit or space key to continue-rts-threshold 2347 2347 short-retry-limit 7 7 long-retry-limit 4 4 fragmentation-threshold 2346 2346 max-tx-msdu-lifetime 512 512 max-rx-lifetime 512 512

W310-1(super)#

136 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

spectralink-compatible-phone

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Root

Use the spectralink-compatible-phone command to enable or disable the

SpectraLink Voice over IP (VoIP) feature for all LAPs.

Use the [no] form of this command to disable SpectraLink VoIP.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] spectralink-compatible-phone <supported | not-supported>

Syntax

supported not-supported

Description

Enables support for SpectraLink Voice over IP.

Disables support for SpectraLink Voice over IP.

! It is recommended that you reboot all the W110s (or LAPs) connected to the W310 once you enable support for SpectraLink or SpectraLink-compatible phones.

Example:

To enable the SpectraLink VoIP feature:

W310-1(super)# spectralink-compatible-phone supported

Done!

To disable the SpectraLink VoIP feature:

W310-1(super)# no spectralink-compatible-phone

Done!

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 137

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

ssid

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Root, Radio card, Template

Use the ssid command to send the service set identifier (SSID) attributes to the Light

Access Point (LAP).

Use the [no] form of this command to remove the SSID name.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] ssid <name>

Syntax

<name>

Description

Name of the Light Access Point to which you want to send the

SSID attributes.

Message:

For Radio card mode only:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. This keeps the SSID name at its present value.

Example:

To send the SSID attributes to a LAP:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# ssid lobby

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y

To restore the default SSID attributes to a LAP:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no ssid lobby

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y

138 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 8

tx-power-level

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the tx-power-level command to control transmit power within an Independent

Basic Service Set (IBSS). The LAP will allow four intervals of transmit power control.

Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default transmit power level.

Syntax:

[no] tx-power-level

<power>

Syntax

power

Description

Level of transmit power control.

For the LAP, the settings include:

• 1250

• 2500

• 5000

• 10000 (default)

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Example:

To set the transmit power level:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# tx-power-level

1250

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 139

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

To restore the default transmit power level:

W310-1(super/LAP lobby/802.11a first-slot)# no tx-power-

level

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

unicast-tx-rate

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Radio card, Template

Use the unicast-tx-rate command to set the transmit rate for unicast traffic for the wireless interface. This command is dependent on the transmit rates supported by the wireless interface.

Use the [no] form of this command to return to the default value of 0 (Auto Fallback).

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] unicast-tx-rate <rate>

140 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Syntax

<rate>

Chapter 8

Description

Unicast transmit rate. The default value of zero (0) is auto fallback. The values of this parameter are given in units of

500 kbps.

• For 802.11b:

— 0 = Auto Fallback

— 2 = 1 Mbps

— 4 = 2 Mbps

— 11 = 5.5 Mbps

— 22 = 11 Mbps

• For 802.11a:

— 0 = Auto Fallback

— 12 = 6 Mbps

— 18 = 9 Mbps

— 24 = 12 Mbps

— 36 = 18 Mbps

— 48 = 24 Mbps

— 72 = 36 Mbps

— 96 = 48 Mbps

— 108 = 54 Mbps

• For 802.11a with Turbo Mode:

— 0 = Auto Fallback

— 24 = 12 Mbps

— 36 = 18 Mbps

— 48 = 24 Mbps

— 72 = 36 Mbps

— 96 = 48 Mbps

— 144 = 72 Mbps

— 192 = 96 Mbps

— 216 = 108 Mbps

1 of 2

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 141

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

142

Syntax

rate

(continued)

Description

• For 802.11g in 802.11g mode only:

— 0 = Auto Fallback

— 12 = 6 Mbps

— 18 = 9 Mbps

— 24 = 12 Mbps

— 36 = 18 Mbps

— 48 = 24 Mbps

— 72 = 36 Mbps

— 96 = 48 Mbps

— 108 = 54 Mbps

• For 802.11g in 802.11b/g mode:

— 0 = Auto Fallback

— 2 = 1 Mbps

— 4 = 2 Mbps

— 11 = 5.5 Mbps

— 12 = 6 Mbps

— 18 = 9 Mbps

— 22 = 11 Mbps

— 24 = 12 Mbps

— 36 = 18 Mbps

— 48 = 24 Mbps

— 72 = 36 Mbps

— 96 = 48 Mbps

— 108 = 54 Mbps

2 of 2

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Example:

To set the unicast transmission rate:

W310-1 (super/LAP lobby/802.11g first-slot)# unicast-tx-

rate 48

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

To restore the default unicast transmission rate:

W310-1(super)# no unicast-tx-rate

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Chapter 8

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 143

Chapter 8 LAP and Radio Card Commands

144 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 9

Logging and RMON Commands

This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure logging and RMON:

clear log

clear logging file

clear logging server

clear rmon statistics

clear utilization cpu

rmon alarm

rmon event

rmon history

set logging file condition

set logging file

set logging server

set logging server access-level

set logging server condition

set logging server disable

set logging server enable

set logging server facility

set logging session condition

set logging session disable

set logging session enable

set utilization cpu

show dev log file

show log

show logging file condition

show logging file content

show logging server condition

show logging session condition

show rmon alarm

show rmon event

show rmon history

show rmon statistics

show utilization

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 145

Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands

clear log

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the clear log command to delete the log file of a switch.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: clear log [<module>]

Syntax

[module]

Description

1

Example:

W310-1# clear log

Cleared all logfiles.

146 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 9

clear logging file

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the clear logging file command to delete the log file, including the history log, and open an empty one.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: clear logging file

Example:

W310-1# clear logging file

Done!

clear logging server

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the clear logging server command to delete a Syslog server from the Syslog server table.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: clear logging server {<ip-address> | <hostname>}

Syntax

<ip-address>

<hostname>

Description

The IP address of the Syslog server.

The hostname of the Syslog server.

Example:

W310-1# clear logging server 149.49.38.22

Done!

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 147

Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands

Related Commands:

Use the

set logging server

command to define a new Syslog output server for remote logging of system messages.

clear rmon statistics

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the clear rmon statistics command to clear all RMON statistics from the switch.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: clear rmon statistics

Example:

W310-1# clear rmon statistics cleared device counters

Related Commands:

Use the

show rmon statistics

command to display RMON statistics.

clear utilization cpu

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the clear utilization cpu command to disable CPU utilization monitoring on the specified module.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: clear utilization cpu <module-number>

Syntax

module-number

Description

1

148 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 9

Example:

W310-1# clear utilization cpu 1

CPU utilization is cleared on module 1

Related Commands:

• Use the

set utilization cpu

command to enable CPU utilization monitoring.

• Use the

show utilization

command to display CPU and RAM usage.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 149

Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands

rmon alarm

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the rmon alarm command to create a new RMON alarm entry. Use the no rmon alarm

command to delete an existing RMON alarm entry.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: rmon alarm <Alarm Number> <variable> <interval> <sample type> rising-threshold <rising threshold> <rising event> fallingthreshold <falling threshold> <falling event> <startup alarm>

<owner> no rmon alarm <Alarm Index>

Syntax

<Alarm Number>

<variable>

<interval>

<sample type>

<rising threshold>

<rising event>

<falling threshold>

<falling event>

<startup alarm>

<owner>

Description

This is the alarm index number of this entry (it is advisable to use the same interface number as your alarm index number.)

This is the MIB variable which will be sampled by the alarm entry.

The interval between 2 samples.

This can be set to either delta (the difference between 2 samples) or an absolute value.

This sets the upper threshold for the alarm entry.

The RMON event entry that will be notified if the upper threshold is passed.

This sets the lower threshold for the alarm entry.

The RMON event entry that will be notified if the lower threshold is passed.

The instances in which the alarm will be activated. The possible parameters are: rising, falling, risingOrfalling.

Owner name string.

150 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 9

Example:

W310-1# rmon alarm 1026 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.5.1026 60

delta rising-threshold 10000 1054 falling-threshold 10 1054 risingOrFalling gregory

alarm 1026 was created successfully

Example:

W310-1# no rmon alarm 1026

Related Commands:

Use the show rmon alarm

command to display the settings for a specific alarm entry.

rmon event

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the rmon event command to create an RMON event entry. Use the no rmon event command to delete an existing RMON event entry.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: rmon event <Event Number> <type> description <description> owner <owner> no rmon event <Event Index>

Syntax

event number type

<description>

<owner>

Description

This is the event index number of this entry.

The type of the event. The possible parameters are:

• trap

• log

• logAndTrap

• none

A description of this event

Owner name string

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 151

Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands

Example:

W310-1# rmon event 1054 logAndTrap description "event for

monitoring gregory's computer" owner gregory

event 1054 was created successfully

Example:

W310-1# no rmon event 1054

Related Commands:

Use the

show rmon event

command to show the settings for an event entry that was

defined by the rmon event command or using the W310 Manager.

rmon history

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the rmon history command to create an RMON history entry. Use the no rmon history command to delete an existing RMON history event.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: rmon history <history index> <module/port> interval <interval> buckets <number of buckets> owner <owner name> no rmon history <History Index>

Syntax

<history index>

<module/port>

<interval>

Description

History index number of this entry (it is advisable to use the same interface number as your history index number).

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

The interval between two samples.

1 of 2

152 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 9

Syntax Description

<number of buckets> The number of buckets defined.

<owner name> The owner name string.

! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.

2 of 2

Example:

W310-1# rmon history 1026 1/2 interval 30 buckets 20 owner

amir

history 1026 was created successfully

Example:

W310-1# no rmon history 1026

Related Commands:

Use the

show rmon history command to display the most recent RMON history log for

a specific history index.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 153

Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands

set logging file condition

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set logging file condition command to define a filter for logging messages to the logging file.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set logging file condition {all | <application>} {none |

<severity>}

Syntax

all

Description

A keyword signifying that logging messages from all applications are logged to the logging file.

1 of 3

154 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Syntax

<application> none

Chapter 9

Description

The application from which logging messages are logged to the logging file. Possible values are:

• Boot

• System

• ROUTER

• CONFIG

• TEMP

• FILESYS

• FAN

• SUPPLY

• SECURITY

• CASCADE

• QOS

• SWITCHFABRIC

• LAG

• VLAN

• OSPF

• RIP

• SNMP

• POLICY

• CLI

• STP

• ATM

• WAN

• THRESHOLD

A keyword signifying that logging messages are logged to the logging file regardless of the severity of the message.

2 of 3

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 155

Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands

Syntax

<severity>

Description

The minimum severity of the logging messages that are logged to the logging file. The severity is represented by an integer.

Possible values are:

0 – Emergency

1 – Alert

2 – Critical

3 – Error

4 – Warning

5 – Notification

6 – Informational

7 – Debugging

3 of 3

Example:

W310-1# set logging file condition 6 2

Done!

Related Commands:

Use the

show logging file condition

command to display the condition and

filtering of the log file.

set logging file

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set logging file disable command to enable or disable logging messages to a logging file.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set logging file {enable | disable}

Example:

W310-1# set logging file disable

Done!

156 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 9

Example:

W310-1# set logging file enable

Done!

set logging server

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set logging server command to define a new Syslog output server for remote logging of system messages. A maximum of three Syslog servers can be configured.

After defining the Syslog server, you must enable logging of system messages to it. To enable logging of system messages to a Syslog server, use the

set logging server enable

command.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set logging server <ip-address>

Syntax

<ip-address>

Description

The IP address of the Syslog server.

Example:

To define a Syslog server at IP address 147.2.3.66:

W310-1# set logging server 147.2.3.66

Done!

Related Commands:

• Use the

clear logging server

command to delete a Syslog server from the

Syslog server table.

• Use the

show logging server condition

command to display the condition and filtering of logging to the Syslog server.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 157

Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands

set logging server access-level

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set logging server access-level command to define the access level associated with Syslog server sink. You cannot specify an access level that is higher than the level assigned to you.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set logging server access-level <admission-level>

{<ip-address> | <hostname>}

Syntax

<admission-level>

<ip-address>

<hostname>

Description

The access level associated with the Syslog server sink.

Possible values are:

• read-only

• read-write

• admin

The IP address of the Syslog server.

The hostname of the Syslog server.

Example:

W310-1# set logging server access-level read-only

149.49.38.22

Done!

Related Commands:

Use the

show logging server condition

command to display the condition and

filtering of logging to the Syslog server.

158 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 9

set logging server condition

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set logging server condition command to define a filter for logging messages to the Syslog server.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set logging server condition {all | <application>} {none |

<severity>} {<ip-address> | <hostname>}

Syntax

all

<application> none

Description

A keyword signifying that logging messages from all applications are logged to the Syslog server.

The application from which logging messages are logged to the

Syslog server. The application is represented by an integer.

Possible values are:

• Boot • LAG

• System

• ROUTER

• CONFIG

• TEMP

VLAN

OSPF

RIP

SNMP

• FILESYS

• FAN

• SUPPLY

• SECURITY

• CASCADE

• QOS

• SWITCHFABRIC

POLICY

CLI

STP

ATM

WAN

THRESHOLD

A keyword signifying that logging messages are logged to the

Syslog server regardless of the severity of the message.

1 of 2

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 159

Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands

Syntax

<severity>

<ip-address>

<hostname>

Description

The minimum severity of the logging messages that are logged to the Syslog server. The severity is represented by an integer.

Possible values are:

0 – Emergency

1 – Alert

2 – Critical

3 – Error

4 – Warning

5 – Notification

6 – Informational

7 – Debugging

The IP address of the Syslog server.

The hostname of the Syslog server.

2 of 2

Example:

W310-1# set logging server condition LAG Warning

135.64.102.224

Done!

160 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 9

set logging server disable

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set logging server disable command to disable logging messages to a

Syslog server.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set logging server disable {<ip-address> | <hostname>}

Syntax

<ip-address>

<hostname>

Description

The IP address of the Syslog server.

The hostname of the Syslog server.

Example:

W310-1# set logging server disable 149.49.35.21

Done!

set logging server enable

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set logging server enable command to enable logging messages to a

Syslog server. To disable logging messages to a Syslog server, use the

set logging server disable command.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set logging server enable {<ip-address> | <hostname>}

Syntax

<ip-address>

<hostname>

Description

The IP address of the Syslog server.

The hostname of the Syslog server.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 161

Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands

Example:

W310-1# set logging server enable 149.49.35.21

Done!

set logging server facility

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set logging server facility command to update the server facility used for sending messages to Syslog server. Server facilities are set per Syslog server.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set logging server facility <server-facility> {<ip-address>

|<hostname>}

Syntax

<server-facility>

Description

The facility used for sending messages to the Syslog server.

Possible values are:

• kern – Kernel

• user – User processes

• mail – Electronic mail

• daemon – Background system processes

• auth – Authorization

• syslog – System logger

• lpr – Printer

• news – Usenet news

• uucp – Unix-to-Unix copy program

• clkd – Clock daemon

• sec – Security

• ftpd – FTP daemon

• ntp – NTP subsystem

• audi – Log audit

• alert – Log alert

• clkd2 – Clock daemon

• local0-local7 – Available for user defined facilities

1 of 2

162 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 9

Syntax

<ip-address>

<hostname>

Description

The IP address of the Syslog server.

The hostname of the Syslog server.

Example:

W310-1# set logging server facility news 135.64.102.224

Done!

2 of 2

set logging session condition

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set logging session condition command to define a filter rule for logging messages during the current session.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set logging session condition {all | <application>} {none |

<severity>}

Syntax

all

Description

The filter applies to logging messages from all applications.

1 of 2

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 163

Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands

Syntax

<application> none

<severity>

Description

The application to which the filter applies. Possible values are:

• Boot • LAG

• System

• ROUTER

• CONFIG

• TEMP

VLAN

OSPF

RIP

SNMP

• FILESYS

• FAN

• SUPPLY

• SECURITY

• CASCADE

• QOS

• SWITCHFABRIC

POLICY

CLI

STP

ATM

WAN

THRESHOLD

Messages are logged regardless of their severity.

The minimum severity of the logging messages that are logged. The severity is represented by an integer. Possible values are:

0 – Emergency

1 – Alert

2 – Critical

3 – Error

4 – Warning

5 – Notification

6 – Informational

7 – Debugging

2 of 2

Example:

W310-1# set logging session condition LAG Warning

Done!

164 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 9

set logging session disable

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set logging session disable command to disable logging messages in the current CLI session.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set logging session disable

Example:

W310-1# set logging session disable

Done!

set logging session enable

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set logging session enable command to enable logging messages in the current CLI session. To disable logging messages in the current CLI session, use the

set logging session disable command.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set logging session enable

Example:

W310-1# set logging session enable

Done!

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 165

Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands

set utilization cpu

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set utilization cpu command to enable CPU utilization monitoring.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set utilization cpu <module-number>

Syntax

<module-number>

Description

1

Example:

W310-1# set utilization cpu 1

CPU utilization is set on module 1

Done!

Related Commands:

• Use the

clear utilization cpu

command to disable CPU utilization monitoring

on the specified module.

• Use the

show utilization

command to display CPU and RAM usage.

166 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 9

show dev log file

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show dev log file command to display the device’s encrypted log file.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show dev log file

Example:

W310-1> show dev log file iW}ZH~YL{}Z(^E^M}=}EsZ^E}Z

ZH~YL{}Zj^M}ZZZZZZDZ(""0Ji HA

Zl{~=ZNLMR}EZZZZZZDZw

Zl~'=;^E}ZK}[email protected]:3:<w

Z!lZjLMR}EZZZZZZZZDZw:3

ZiW}Zl^>}YZn^=^ZzsDZ

ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ

show log

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show log command to display an device’s encrypted reset log.

! This command is for Avaya technical support use.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show log [<mod_num>]

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 167

Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands

Example:

W310-1> show log 1

MODULE 1, MESSAGE 01:

00000000 0 05002966 0205 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

MODULE 1, MESSAGE 02:

00000000 0 00004242 0205 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

MODULE 1, MESSAGE 03:

00000000 0 00002395 0205 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

show logging file condition

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show logging file condition command to display the condition and filtering of the log file.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show logging file condition

Example:

W310-1> show logging file condition

*********************************************************

Message logging configuration of FILE sink ***

Sink Is Enabled

Sink default severity: none

Related Commands:

Use the

set logging file condition

command to define a filter for logging

messages to the logging file.

168 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 9

show logging file content

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show logging file content command to display the contents of the log file.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show logging file content [<severity>] [{all | <application>}]

[<number>] [<module number>]

Syntax

[<severity>] all

Description

The minimum severity of the logging messages that are displayed. The severity is represented by an integer. Possible values are:

• 0 – Emergency

• 1 – Alert

• 2 – Critical

• 3 – Error

• 4 – Warning

• 5 – Notification

• 6 – Informational

• 7 – Debugging

The filter applies to logging messages from all applications.

1 of 2

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 169

Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands

Syntax Description

<application> The application to which the filter applies. Possible values are:

• Boot

• System

• ROUTER

• CONFIG

• TEMP

• FILESYS

• FAN

• SUPPLY

• SECURITY

• CASCADE

• QOS

• SWITCHFABRIC

• LAG

• VLAN

• OSPF

• RIP

• SNMP

• POLICY

• CLI

• STP

• ATM

• WAN

• THRESHOLD

[<number>] The number of messages to display. If no number is specified, all messages are displayed.

[<module number>] 1

2 of 2

Example:

W310-1> show logging file content 7 all

1 > 08/04/2003,15:43:36:CLI-Notification: root: set logging file condition all 7

170 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 9

show logging server condition

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show logging server condition command to display the condition and filtering of logging to the Syslog server.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show logging server condition

Example:

W310-1> show logging server condition

*********************************************************

Message logging configuration of SYSLOG sink ***

Sink Is Enabled

Sink default severity: Warning

Server name: 149.49.38.22

Server facility: local7

Server access level: read-write

Related Commands:

• Use the

set logging server

command to define a new Syslog output server for remote logging of system messages.

• Use the

set logging server access-level

command to define the access level associated with Syslog server sink.

show logging session condition

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show logging session condition command to display the condition and filtering of logging in the current CLI session.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show logging session condition

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 171

Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands

Example:

W310-1> show logging session condition

*********************************************************

Message logging configuration of SESSION sink ***

Sink Is Enabled

Sink default severity: Error

Facility ! Severity Override

-------------------------------------------

SUPPLY ! Warning

Session source ip: 135.64.102.224

show rmon alarm

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show rmon alarm command to display the settings for a specific alarm entry

that was set by using the rmon alarm

command or using the W310 Manager.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show rmon alarm [<Alarm Index>]

Syntax

[<Alarm Index>]

Description

Alarm index number defined using the

rmon alarm

command or the W310 Manager.

172 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 9

Example:

W310-1> show rmon alarm 1026 alarm alarm 1026 is active, owned by amir

Monitors ifEntry.1.1026 every 60 seconds

Taking delta samples, last value was 1712

Rising threshold is 10000, assigned to event # 1054

Falling threshold is 10, assigned to event # 1054

On startup enable rising or_falling alarms.

Related Commands:

Use the rmon alarm

command to create a new RMON alarm entry.

show rmon event

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show rmon event command to show the settings for an event entry that was defined by the

rmon event

command or using the W310 Manager.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show rmon event [<Event Index>]

Syntax

[<Event Index>]

Description

Event index number defined using the

rmon event

command or the W310 Manager

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 173

Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands

Example:

W310-1> show rmon event 1026 event

Event 1054 is active, owned by amir

Description is event for monitoring amir's co

Event firing causes log and trap to community public,last fired 0:0:0

Related Commands:

Use the

rmon event

command to create an RMON event entry.

show rmon history

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show rmon history command to display the most recent RMON history log for a specific history index. The history index is defined using the

rmon history

command or using an RMON management tool (W310 Device Manager).

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show rmon history [<History Index>]

Syntax Description

[<History Index>] History index number defined using the

rmon history

command or RMON management tool

174 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 9

Example:

W310-1> show rmon history 1026 history

Entry 1026 is active, owned by amir

Monitors ifEntry.1.1026 every 30 seconds

Requested # of time intervals, ie buckets, is 20

Granted # of time intervals, ie buckets, is 20

Sample # 1 began measuring at 2:53:9

Received 62545 octets, 642 packets,

391 broadcast and 145 multicast packets,

0 undersize and 0 oversize packets,

0 fragments and 0 jabbers,

0 CRC alignment errors and 0 collisions,

# of dropped packet events (due to a lack of resources): 0

Network utilization is estimated at 0

Related Commands:

Use the rmon history

command to create an RMON history entry.

show rmon statistics

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show rmon statistics command to show the Received Packet RMON statistics counters for a specific interface according to the MIB-2 interface table numbering scheme.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show rmon statistics [<module/port>]

Syntax

[<module/port range>]

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 175

Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands

Example:

W310-1> show rmon statistics

Statistics for switch is active,owned by Monitor

Monitors ifEntry.1.1026 which has

Received 26375085 octets, 222536 packets,

154821 broadcast and 53909 multicast packets,

0 undersize and 0 oversize packets,

0 fragments and 0 jabbers,

1 CRC alignment errors and 0 collisions,

# of dropped packet events (due to a lack of resources): 0

# of packets received of length (in octets):

64:94530, 65-127:85124, 128-255:25896,

256-511:10440, 512-1023:6057, 1024-1518:489

Related Commands:

Use the

clear rmon statistics

command to clear all RMON statistics from the

switch.

show utilization

Use the show utilization command to display CPU and RAM usage.

! To see CPU utilization, you must first enable the counter using the set utilization cpu

command.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show utilization

Example:

W310-1> show utilization

Mod CPU CPU RAM RAM

5sec 60sec used(%) Total(Kb)

--- ------ ----- ------- ----------

1 1% 90% 39% 50217 Kb

176 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 9

Field

Mod

CPU 5sec

CPU 60sec

RAM used (%)

RAM Total (Kb)

Description

Module number (always 1)

CPU utilization in the past five seconds

CPU utilization in the past 60 seconds

Percentage of RAM used

Total amount of RAM in W310

Related Commands:

• Use the

clear utilization cpu

command to disable CPU utilization monitoring on the specified module.

• Use the

set utilization cpu

command to enable CPU utilization monitoring.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 177

Chapter 9 Logging and RMON Commands

178 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10

Policy Commands

Overview

This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure policies on the W310.

The W310 provides two types of policies: Access Control List (ACL) and Quality of Service

(QoS).

For each IP packet, an ACL rule is matched. If the packet is allowed, a QoS rule is matched.

The ACL and QoS policy lists are searched according to the interface where the packet either

• arrives or

• is transmitted.

Policies are applied by classifying packets according to key fields in the packets.

The W310 policy scheme differentiates between

• packets to the W310 (ingress policy) and

• packets going out of the W310 (egress policy)

Ingress and Egress Policy

Ingress policy is enforced on packets coming from Light Access Point (LAP) ports while egress policy is enforced on packets destined to LAP ports. Packets that arrive from an

Access Point (AP) port or destined to an AP port are classified according to the group that the AP belongs to. The Access Point Group (APG) is an identifier that aggregates ports that have the same policy behavior. The APG and the direction is the context in which the policy operations take place. This will be referred to as PEP or AP Group (policy enforcement point). Every PEP/AP Group shall have several lists attached to it, such as ACL, QoS and several scalars that define its attributes.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 179

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

Chapter Contents

This chapter contains the following sections:

W310 Policy Commands

Setting Policy: Example 1

Setting Policy: Example 2

Setting Policy: Example 3

Setting Policy: Example 4

Setting Policy: Example 5

W310 Policy Commands

This section describes the following commands:

clear-policy-statistics

composite-operation

cookie

cos

destination-ip

destination-user-group

dscp

dscp-table

ether-type

ether-type-rule

ether-type simulate

icmp

ip access-control-list

ip access-group

ip-fragments-in

ip-option-in

ip policy-list-copy

ip-protocol

ip qos-group

ip qos-list

ip-rule

ip simulate

name

owner

pre-classification

show dscp-table

show ether-type-rule

show ip access-control-list

show ip active-policy-lists

show ip qos-list

show ip-rule

show list

show-policy-statistics

source-ip

source-user-group

tcp destination-port

tcp-established

tcp source-port

traffic-type

udp destination-port

udp source-port

180 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

clear-policy-statistics

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Root, PEP/AP Group

Use the clear-policy-statistics command to reset the policy statistics.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: clear-policy-statistics [<interface> <direction> [<listtype>]]

Syntax

<interface>

<direction>

[<list-type>]

Description

Resets the policy list(s) for the specified interface.

!

This parameter is required in the Root command mode only.

Resets the statistics by the direction of the policy (to/from interface) or policy list number.

Specify the list type assigned for this choice

Example::

W310-1 (super)# clear policy-statistics

Clearing statistics for:

Interface: floor4 Direction: In List: Default ACL List

Interface: floor4 Direction: In List: Default QoS List

Interface: floor4 Direction: Out List: Default ACL List

Interface: floor4 Direction: Out List: Default QoS List

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 181

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

composite-operation

User level: privileged, supervisor.

The following table describes when to use the composite-operation command.

Command Mode

QoS List

IP Rule

QoS Rule

Ether Type Rule

Description

Use the composite operation command to create a composite operation or enter Composite Operation command mode for the composite operation specified.

Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default value.

Use the composite-operation command to set the operation performed on packets that match the specified rule.

Use the composite-operation command to set the operation performed on packets that match the specified rule.

Use the composite-operation command to set the operation performed on packets that match the specified rule.

182 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is shown in the following table.

Command Mode

QoS List

DSCP Table

Ether Type Rule

IP Rule

QoS Rule

Syntax

[no] composite-operation <index>

[no] composite-operation {no-change |

CoS0 | CoS1 | CoS2 | CoS3 | CoS4 | CoS5

| CoS6 | CoS7 | trust-DSCP-only | trust-

DSCP-CoS | <composite-operation-name>} composite-operation {permit | deny | deny-notify} composite-operation (Permit | Deny |

Deny-Notify | Deny-Rst | Deny-Notify-

Rst}

[no] composite-operation {no-change |

CoS0 | CoS1 | CoS2 | CoS3 | CoS4 | CoS5

| CoS6 | CoS7 | trust-DSCP-only | trust-

DSCP-CoS | <composite-operation-name>}

The following table describes the syntax parameters.

Syntax

<index>

Description

Index number assigned to the composite operation.

1 of 2

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 183

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

184

Syntax

no-change

CoS0

CoS1

CoS2

CoS3

CoS4

CoS5

CoS6

CoS7 trust-dscp-only trust-dscp-and-cos operation to be applied

Description

Specify the following:

no-change indicates there is no change to the priority for the composite operation settings.

• Priority Class of Service (CoS). CoS is traffic differentiation or the ability to treat packets differently based on the packet’s importance.

• Priority tags used with the data flow using trust-dscp-only or

trust-dscp-and-cos

Specify the operation that should be applied to a packet.

Permit (default)

• Deny

Deny-Notify - Denies the operation and notifies the administrator.

Deny-Rst - Denies the operation and resets the rule.

Deny-Notify-Rst - Denies the operation, notifies the administrator, and resets the rule.

2 of 2

Example:

Command Mode: IP Rule Table

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# composite-operation Deny

Done!

Command Mode: QoS Rule Table

W310-1(super/QoS 401)# composite-operation deny

Done!

Command Mode: Ether Type Rule

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ether type rule 100)# composite-

operation deny

Done!

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

Command Mode: ACL/Qos List

W310-1(super/QoS 401)# composite-operation 12

W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 12)#

cookie

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: List

Use the cookie command to set the list cookie for an access control list (ACL) or QoS list.

This is used by the quality of service (QoS) manager. Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default value.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] cookie <cookie>

Syntax

<cookie>

Description

ID number of the cookie for the ACL. The default value is 0.

Example:

W310-1(super/ACL 330)# cookie 12345

Done!

W310-1(super/ACL 330)#

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 185

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

cos

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: CoS

Use the cos command to set the priority value for the current composite operation. Use the

[no] form of the command to reset the priority to the default value of no-change.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] cos no-change | <priority-value>

Syntax

no-change

<priority value>

Description

no-change - the default value indicates the priority has not changed

Sets the priority value for the Class of Service. The range is 0 to

7.

Example:

W310-1(super/QoS 401)# composite-operation 12

W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 12)# cos 2

Done!

186 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

destination-ip

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: IP Rule Table

Use the destination-ip command to set the requested destination IP address for packets to which the current IP rule applies.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[not] destination-ip {host <ip-address> | any | <ip-address>

<wildcard>}

Syntax Description

host • ip-address: IP address of a specific host.

any: Current rule applies to any address

<ip-address>

<wildcard>

Requested destination IP address.

Range of IP addresses of the rule.

The zero bits in the wildcard correspond to bits in the IP address that remain fixed. The one bits in the wildcard correspond to bits in the IP address that can vary. Note that this is the opposite of how bits are used in a netmask.

not Destination IP address of packets to which this rule is not applied. The rule is applied to all destination IP addresses except for those that you specify with not keyword.

Example:

To specify that rule 21 applies to all packets having destination IP address 135.64.104.102

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# destination-ip host

135.64.104.102

Done!

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 187

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

To specify that rule 21 applies to packets whose destination IP address is in the range of

176.13.0.0 through 176.13.255.255:

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# destination-ip 176.13.0.0

0.0.255.255

Done!

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#

destination-user-group

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: IP Rule Table

Use the destination-user-group command to set the destination policy user group name to match.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[not] destination-user-group <name>

Syntax

<name> not

Description

Destination policy user group name. Up to 32 characters.

Destination user group of packets to which this rule is not applied. The rule is applied to all destination user groups except for those that you specify with not keyword.

Example:

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# destination-user-group

finance

Done!

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#

188 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

dscp

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: List

Use the dscp command to set the differentiated service code point (DSCP) value for the current policy operation. The DSCP value in the IP packets can be used to classify the traffic based on the DSCP-to-Class of Service (CoS) mappings. Use the [no] form of this command to return to the default value of no-change.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] dscp <value> | no-change

Syntax

<value> no-change

Description

DSCP value that should be applied to packets. Values range from

0 to 63.

no-change means the DSCP value is left unchanged. This is the default.

Example:

W310-1(super/QoS 401)# composite-operation 12

W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 12)# dscp 23

Done!

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 189

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

dscp-table

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: CoS

Use the dscp-table command to enter or create the differentiated service code point

(DSCP) Table command mode for the specified DSCP value.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: dscp-table <dscp-value>

Syntax

<dscp-value>

Description

DSCP value. The range is 0 to 63.

Example:

W310-1(super/QoS 401)# dscp-table 23

W310-1(super/QoS 401/dscp 23)#

ether-type

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Ether Type Rule Table

Use the ether-type command to specify the packet’s ether type.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: ether-type <type>

Syntax

<type>

Description

Packet’s ether type. The range is 0 to 65535. IP protocol (2048) is not allowed.

190 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

Example:

W310-1(super/ACL 310/ether type rule 21)# ether-type 50

Done!

W310-1(super/ACL 310/ether type rule 21)#

ether-type-rule

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: IP Rule Table

Use the ether-type-rule command to create or enter an ether type rule.

Use the [no] form of this command to delete the rule.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] ether-type-rule {<index> | default}

Syntax

<index> default

Description

Number of the rule. The range is from 1 to 9999.

Use the default rule.

Example:

W310-1(super/ACL 330)# ether-type-rule 21

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ether type rule 21)#

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 191

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

ether-type simulate

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: PEP/AP Group

Use the ether-type simulate command to specify the ether type packet simulation.

For ether type IP access control list (ACL).

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: ether-type simulate <list-number> <direction> <ether-type>

<traffic-type>

192

Syntax

<list-number>

<direction>

<ether-type>

<traffic-type>

Description

Access Control List (ACL) for the specified interface. Range is

300 to 399, 300 is the default ACL list.

Sort the display by interface, the direction of the policy (to/from interface), or policy list number. Use one of the following:

• in

• out

Packet’s ether type. The range is 0 to 65535.

• unicast - used for a single sender and receiver on a network

• broadcast - used for a single sender and all receivers n a network

• multicast - used for a single sender and a select number of receivers on a network

Example:

W310-1(super/AP Group engineering)# ether-type simulate 300

in 500 unicast

Rule match for simulated packet is the default rule

Composite action for simulated packet is Permit

Access is Forward

W310-1(super/AP Group engineering)#

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

icmp

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: IP Rule Table

Use the icmp command to specify that the current rule applies to a specific type of Internet

Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet.

Use the not

form of this command to specify that the rule applies to all packets except those of the specified ICMP type.

Note: The icmp command also sets the IP protocol to ICMP.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[not] icmp {<name> | <type> <code>}

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 193

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

Syntax

name type code

Description

ICMP message name, type and code. Enter either the name (with a dash between each word) or the type and code. See the list below.

Name

Echo-Reply

Unreachable

Network unreachable

Host unreachable

Protocol unreachable

Port unreachable

Fragmentation needed but DF bit set

Source route failed

Destination network unknown

Destination host unknown

Destination network administratively prohibited

Network unreachable for

TOS

Host unreachable for

TOS

Communication administratively prohibited by filtering

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

3

Type

0

2

3

Code

0

Don’t care

0

1

4

5

6

7

9

Name

Host precedence violation

Precedence cutoff in effect

Source quench

Type

3

3

4

Redirect

Redirect for network

Redirect for host

Redirect for type-of-service and network

Redirect for type-of-service and host

5

5

5

5

5

8 Echo request

Router advertisement

Router solicitation

10

Code

14

15

0

Don’t care

0

1

2

3

0

0

11

12

13

Time exceeded 11

Time-to-live equals 0 during transit

Time-to-live equals 0 during reassembly

11

11

Don’t care

0

1

194 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

Syntax

name type code

(continued)

Description

Name

Parameters problem

Bad IP header

Required option missing

Timestamp requested

Timestamp reply

12

13

14

Address mask request

17

Traceroute

Traceroute outbound packet successfully forwarded

Traceroute no route for outbound packet

30

30

30

Type

12

12

Code

Don’t care

0

1

0

0

0

Don’t care

0

1

Name

Conversion errors

Mobile Host

Redirect 32 ipv6-where-areyou 33 ipv6-I-am-here

34

Mobile registration request

Mobile registration reply

Domain name request

Domain name replay

35

36

37

38

Skip algorithm discovery protocol

Security failure

39

40

Type

31

Don’t care

Don’t care

Don’t care

Don’t care

0

Code

Don’t care

Don’t care

0

0

Don’t care

Example:

Using the type and code:

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# icmp 0 0

Rule protocol changed!

Done!

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 195

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

Using the name:

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# icmp Echo-Reply

Done!

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#

ip access-control-list

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the ip access-control-list command to create an access control list (also called IP policy) or to enter ACL List command mode. This enters the configuration mode for the specified access control list. Use the [no] form of this command to delete an IP access list.

Note: You cannot delete an active list with the [no] form of this command.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] ip access-control-list <index>

Syntax

<index>

Description

Access control list (ACL). This will enter you into the list’s command mode. Range is 301 to 399. The default is 301.

Example:

W310-1(super)# ip access-control-list 330

W310-1(super/ACL 330)#

196 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

ip access-group

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: AP Group Interface

Command Mode:

Use the ip access-group command to activate a specific ACL list for an AP Group in the direction specified.

Syntax:

ip access-group <policy-list-number> {in | out}

Syntax Description

<policy-list-number> ACL to activate. Range is 301 to 399. The default is 301.

Example:

W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)# ip access-group 301 in

ip-fragments-in

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: List

Use the ip-fragments-in command to set the treatment that is applied to incoming IP fragmentation packets for the current access control list.

Use the [no] form of this command to return to the default value.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] ip-fragments-in {Permit | Deny}

Syntax

{Permit | Deny}

Description

Permit IP fragmentation packets

Deny IP fragmentation packets

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 197

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

Example:

W310-1(super/ACL 330)# ip fragments-in Deny

ip-option-in

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: List

Use the ip-option-in command to specify the treatment of packets carrying an IP option that enter the current interface.

Use the no form of the command to restore the default treatment of IP option packets.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] ip-option-in {Permit | Deny | Deny-Notify | Deny-Rst |

Deny-Notify-Rst}

Syntax

Action

Description

Permit packets carrying IP options

Deny packets carrying IP options

Deny-Notify denies packets carrying IP options and notifies the administrator

Deny-Rst denies packets carrying IP options and resets the connection.

Deny-Notify-Rst denies packets carrying IP options, notifies the administrator, and resets the connection.

Example:

W310-1(super/ACL 330)# ip option-in Deny-Notify

198 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

ip policy-list-copy

User level: supervisor

Use the ip policy-list-copy to copy an existing policy list to a new destination.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: ip policy-list-copy <source-list> <destination-list>

Syntax

<source-list>

<destination-list>

Description

Source list number to copy.

• For access control lists: 300 - 399

• For QoS lists: 400 - 499

List number to which you want to copy the original policy list.

• For access control lists: 301 - 399

• For QoS lists: 401 - 499

Example:

To copy a policy list:

W310-1(super)# ip policy-list-copy 400 401

Done!

W310-1(super)#

ip-protocol

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: IP Rule Table

Use the ip-protocol command to set the IP protocol for the current rule. This specifies that the current rule applies to all packets having the specified IP protocol.

Use the not form of this command to specify that the current rule applies to all packets except those having the specified IP protocol.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 199

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[not] ip-protocol {<name> | <number>}

Syntax

{<name> |

<number>

Description

Use the protocol name or the protocol number. See list below.

Protocol

Ah

Esp

Icmp

Igmp

Ipcomp

Ipinip

Ospf

Pim

Rsvp

Tcp

Udp

Vrrp

Spectralink

No.

Description

51 Authentication header protocol

50

1

Encapsulation security protocol

Internet Control Message Protocol

4

89

2 Internet Gateway Message Protocol

108 IP payload compression protocol

IP in IP tunneling

OSPF routing protocol

103 Protocol Independent Multicast

46 Resource reservation protocol

6

17

Transmission Control Protocol

User Datagram Protocol

112 Virtual routing redundancy protocol

119 SpectraLink wireless phones

[not] Excludes the specified protocol from the rule.*/

200 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

Example:

Using the protocol name:

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# ip-protocol igmp

Done!

Using the number assigned to the protocol:

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# ip-protocol 2

Done!

ip qos-group

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: AP Group Interface

Command Mode:

Use the ip qos-group command to activate a specific QoS list for an AP Group in the direction specified.

Syntax:

ip qos-group <policy-list-number> {in | out}

Syntax Description

<policy-list-number> QoS list to activate. This is a range of 401 to 499. The default is

401.

Example:

W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)# ip qos-group 402 out

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 201

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

ip qos-list

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: QoS Rule Table

Use the ip qos-list command to create a QoS list or enter QoS List command mode for an existing QoS list.

Use the [no] form of this command to delete the list.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] ip qos-list <list>

Syntax

<list>

Description

Identification for the QoS list. This is a range of 401 to 499. The default is 401.

Example:

W310-1(super)# ip qos-list 401

W310-1(super/QoS 401)#

202 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

ip-rule

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: List

Use the ip-rule command to create a rule or enter IP Rule mode for a specific IP rule.

Use the [no] form of this command to delete the rule.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] ip-rule {<index> | default}

Syntax

<index> default

Description

Number of the rule from within the policy list. Specify a number from 1 to 9999.

Use this keyword to enter IP Rule command mode for the default rule. The default rule applies to packets that do not match any other rules in the policy.

Example:

To enter the IP Rule command mode for IP rule 21:

W310-1(super/ACL 330)# ip-rule 21

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 203

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

ip simulate

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: PEP/AP Group

Use the ip-simulate command to test the action of a policy on a simulated packet. For IP

ACL and QoS policies.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: ip-simulate <list-number> <direction> [<priority>] [<dscpvalue>] <source> <destination> [<protocol>] | [udp {<source port> | <name>} {<destination-port> | <name>}] | [tcp

{<source-port> | <name>} {<destination- port> | <name>}

[established]] | [icmp {<name> | <type> <code>} ]

204

Syntax

<list>

<direction>

<priority>

<dscp-value>

<source>

<destination>

<protocol>

Description

Policy list(s) for the specified interface.

• 300 to 499; 300 is default ACL or 400 is default QoS

Sort the display by interface, the direction of the policy (to or from interface), or policy list number. Enter one of the following:

• in

• out

The priority of the policy. Enter CoS0, CoS1, CoS2, CoS3,

CoS4, CoS5, CoS6, or CoS7

Differentiated service code point value. The range for this value is dscp0 to dscp63.

The source IP address

The destination IP address

The protocol to use

• udp for user datagram protocol

• tcp for transmission control protocol

• icmp for Internet control message protocol

1 of 2

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

Syntax Description

<source port> |

<name>

<destination port> |

<name>

[established] icmp name icmp type icmp code

The ip address of the source port of the simulated packet or the name of the rule that applies to the protocol.

The ip address of the destination port of the simulated packet or the name of the rule that applies to the protocol

The value of the TCP established bit

Specify the rule that applies to the icmp

Specify the icmp type to which the rule applies

Specify the icmp code to which the rule applies.

2 of 2

Example:

W310-1(super/AP-Group engineering)# ip simulate 450 out

CoS4 149.30.120.4 149.29.140.90 icmp 3 0

Rule match for simulated packet is Permit

Composite action for simulated packet is Permit

Access us Forward

ACL action for ip-fragments : Permit

ACL action for ip-options: Permit

W310-1(super/AP-Group engineering)#

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 205

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

name

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: List, QoS Table Rule

Use the name command to set the name for the policy access control list or QoS list.

Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default name, depending on the command mode.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] name <name>

Syntax

<name>

Description

Name for the policy access control list (ACL) or QoS list. The default names are as follows.

• ACL: ACL List #list-number

• QoS: QoS List #list-number

• Composite Operation #index

Example:

Command Mode: ACL and QoS List

W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 12)# name engcomposite

Done!

W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 12)#

Command Mode: QoS Table Rule

W310-1(super/ACL 330)# name admin23

Done!

W310-1(super/ACL 330)#

206 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

owner

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: ACL List, QoS List

Use the owner command to set the list owner for the policy access control list or QoS list.

Use the [no] form of this command to return to the default owner.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] owner <owner-name>

Syntax

<owner-name>

Description

Owner for the policy access control list or QoS list. The default value is other. Use up to 80 characters to set an owner.

Example:

W310-1(super/ACL 330)# owner admin

Done!

W310-1(super/ACL 330)#

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 207

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

pre-classification

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: QoS Rule Table

Use the pre-classification command to specify which priority tag the current QoS list uses for data flows. The default setting is trust-cos-dscp.

Use the no form of the command to reset the QoS list to use the default priority tag, trustcos-dscp.

Syntax:

[no] pre-classification {untrusted | trust-cos | trust-dscp | trust-cos-dscp}

Syntax

{untrusted | trustcos | trust-dscp | trust-cos-dscp}

Description

Specify the type of priority tag:

• trusted

trust-cos (class of service)

trust-dscp (differentiated service code point)

trust-cos-dscp (default)

Example:

W310-1(super/QoS 401)# pre-classification trust-dscp

Done!

W310-1(super/QoS 401)#

208 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

show dscp-table

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: List, IP Rule Table, Composite Operation, DSCP Table

Use show dscp-table to display a specific entry or all entries for the differentiated service code point (DSCP) table. Null argument shows all.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show dscp-table [<index> | all]]

Syntax

<index> all

Description

The DSCP entry.

This keyword is used in DSCP Table command mode only.

Example:

W310-1(super/QoS 401)# show dscp-table

Trust configuration is trust-cos

DSCP Action Name

---- ------ -------

0 CoS0 DSCP#0

1 CoS0 DSCP#1

2 CoS0 DSCP#2

3 CoS0 DSCP#3

4 CoS0 DSCP#4

5 CoS0 DSCP#5

6 CoS0 DSCP#6

7 CoS0 DSCP#7

8 CoS1 DSCP#8

9 CoS1 DSCP#9

.

.

.

63 CoS7 DSCP#63

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 209

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

show ether-type-rule

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: List, Ether Type Rule Table

Use the show ether-type-rule command to display the entries for an ether-type rule number. Null argument shows all.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

Command Mode: List

show ether-type-rule [<index>]

Command Mode: Ether Type Rule Table

show ether-type-rule [<index> | all]

Syntax

<index> all

Description

Ether-type rule number. If omitted, all ether type rules display.

Displays all the ether type rules. This is the default.

Example:

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# show ether-type-rule

Index Ether-Type Traffic-Type Operation

----- ---------- ------------ ---------

21 21 Multicast Permit

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#

210 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

show ip access-control-list

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Root, AP-Group

Use the show ip access-control-list command to display the attributes of a specific access control list on the current interface.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

Command Mode: Root

show ip access-control-list {<list> | all | <interface>}

[detailed]

Command Mode: Interface

show ip access-control-list {<list> | all | {active-list-in | active-list-out | active-list-in-out}} [detailed]

Syntax

<list> all

<interface>

{active-list-in | active-list-out | active-list-in-out}

[detailed]

Description

Policy list(s) for the specified interface.

! This parameter is required in the Root command mode only.

Displays all access control lists

The interface

active-list-in displays lists for the ingress direction

active-list-out displays lists for the egress direction

active-list-in-out displays lists for both the ingress and egress directions

Display detailed information

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 211

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

Example:

W310-1(super)# show ip access-control-list all detailed

List Number: 300

---------------

List Name: Default ACL List

Default Action: permit

Owner: other

List Number: 320

---------------

List Name: Sync1

Default Action: permit

Owner: x9393

List Number: 330

---------------

List Name: Admin13

Default Action: permit

Owner: Charlie

show ip active-policy-lists

User level: supervisor

Command Mode: Root, PEP/AP Group

Use the show ip active-policy-lists to display the active policy lists.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

Command Mode: Root

show ip active-policy-lists <interface> [sort-by-interface | direction | type | list-number]

212 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

Command Mode: PEP/AP Group

show ip active-policy-lists [all] [direction | type | listnumber]

Syntax Description

<interface>

[sort-by-interface | direction | type | listnumber] all

Policy list(s) for the specified interface.

Sort the display by interface, the direction of the policy (to/from interface), or policy list number.

Displays all the active policy lists on the device.

Example:

To display the active policy lists in Root command mode:

W310-1(super)# show ip active-policy-lists

Interface Name Dir. Type Idx List Name

-------------------------------- ---- ---- --- ------------------

In ACL 300 Default ACL List

In QoS 400 Default QoS List

Out ACL 300 Default ACL List

Out QoS 400 Default QoS List

To display active policy lists in PEP/AP Group command mode:

W310-1(super)# show ip active-policy-lists

Interface Name Dir. Type Idx List Name

-------------------------------- ---- ---- --- -----------------engineering Out ACL 300 Default ACL List engineering Out QoS 400 Default QoS List engineering In ACL 300 Default ACL List engineering In QoS 400 Default QoS List

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 213

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

show ip qos-list

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Root, Interface

Use show ip qos-list to display the attributes for a specific Quality of Service (QoS) list or all QoS lists for the current interface.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

Command Mode: Root

show ip qos-list {<list> | all | <interface>} [detailed]

Command Mode: Interface

show ip qos-list {<list> | all | {active-list-in | activelist-out | active-list-in-out}} [detailed]

Syntax

<list> all

<interface>

{active-list-in | active-list-out | active-list-in-out}

[detailed]

Description

QoS list(s) for the specified interface to display.

! This parameter is required in the Root command mode only.

Displays all QoS lists.

Interface is not required for the Interface command mode.

Otherwise, specify the interface type.

Specify as follows:

active-list-in displays lists for the ingress direction

active-list-out displays lists for the egress direction

active-list-in-out displays lists for both the ingress and egress directions

Displays detailed information

214

Example:

W310-1(super)# show ip qos-list

Index Name Owner

----- ----------- ------------

400 Default QoS List other

401 list #401 other

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

show ip-rule

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: List, IP Rule Table

Use the show ip-rule command to display the attributes for the specific rule. Leave the

[index] parameter blank to display all rules.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

Command Mode: List

show ip-rule [index]

Command Mode: IP Rule Table

show ip-rule [index | all]

Syntax

index all

Description

IP rule number. Leave blank to display all rules.

Displays the attributes for all IP rules.

Example:

W310-1(super/ACL 301)# show ip-rule

Index Protocol IP / User-Group Wildcard Port Operation

----- -------- --- ---------------- --------------- ------------ --------

Deflt Any Src Any Any Permit

Dst Any Any

W310-1(super/ACL 301)#

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 215

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

show list

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: List

Use the show list command to display information about the access control list.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show list [detailed]

Syntax

[detailed]

Description

Displays the information details for the access control list.

Example:

W310-1(super/ACL 330)# show list

Index Name Owner

-------------------------------------------------------

330 list #330 other ip options: Permit ip fragments: Permit

Index Protocol IP/User-Group Wildcard Port Operation

----- -------- ------------- -------- ---- ---------

Deflt Any Src Any Any Permit

Dst Any Any

Index Name Access Notify Reset-Connection

---------- ------ --------------- ----------------

0 Permit forward no-trap no-reset

1 Deny deny no-trap no-reset

3 Deny-Notify deny trap no-reset

Ether Type Rule Table:

Index Ether-Type Traffic-Type Operation

216 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

show-policy-statistics

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Root, PEP/AP Group

Use the show-policy-statistics command to display the hits per policy list rule.

• The IP and ether type for the Access Control List (ACL).

• IP for the Quality of Service (QoS).

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show-policy-statistics [<interface> <direction> [<listtype>]]

Syntax

<interface>

<direction>

<list-type>

Description

Policy list(s) for the specified interface.

! This parameter is required in the Root command mode only.

Sort the display by interface, the direction of the policy (to or from interface), or policy list number.

Policy list type - ACL or QoS.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 217

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

Example::

W310-1# show-policy-statistics

Interface: floor2 Direction: In List: Default ACL List

Index Session Counter Packet Counter

--------- --------------- --------------

10000 0 0

Interface: floor2 Direction: In List: Default QoS List

Index Session Counter Packet Counter

--------- --------------- --------------

10000 0 0

Interface: floor2 Direction: Out List: Default ACL List

Index Session Counter Packet Counter

--------- --------------- --------------

10000 0 0

218

Interface: floor2 Direction: Out List: Default QoS List

Index Session Counter Packet Counter

--------- --------------- --------------

10000 0 0

Interface: floor1 Direction: In List: Default ACL List

Index Session Counter Packet Counter

--------- --------------- --------------

10000 0 0

Interface: floor1 Direction: In List: Default QoS List

Index Session Counter Packet Counter

--------- --------------- --------------

10000 0 0

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

source-ip

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: IP Rule Table

Use the source-ip command to set the IP address of the source station. This indicates that the current rule applies to packets from the specified source IP address.

Use the not form of the command to indicate that the current rule applies to all packets

except those coming from the specified IP address

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[not] source-ip {host <ip-address> | any | <ip-address>

<wildcard>}

Syntax Description

host • ip-address: Specify the IP address of a specific host.

any: Specifies any source IP address.

<ip-address>

<wildcard> not

Requested source IP address of packets to which this rule is applied.

Range of IP address

Source IP address of packets to which this rule is not applied.

The rule is applied to all source IP addresses except for those that you specify with not keyword.

Example:

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# source-ip host

135.64.104.102

Done!

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 219

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

source-user-group

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: IP Rule Table

Use the source-user-group command to set the source policy user group name.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[not] source-user-group <name>

Syntax

<name> not

Description

Source policy user group name. Up to 32 characters.

Source user group of packets to which this rule is not applied.

The rule is applied to all source user groups except those that you specify with not keyword.

Example:

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# source-user-group finance

Done!

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#

220 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

tcp destination-port

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: IP Rule Table

Use the tcp destination-port command to set the requested Transmission Control

Protocol (TCP) destination ports to match. The protocol must be set to TCP.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[not] tcp destination-port { any | {eq | lt | gt} {<port-name>

| <port-number>} | range <start-port> <end-port> }

Syntax

any

{eq | lt | gt}

Description

Applies the rule to a port with any name or number.

Specifies one of the following:

eq (equal) applies the rule to a port whose name or number matches exactly to the specified name or number

lt (lower than) applies the rule to a port whose name or number is less than the specified name or number

gt applies the rule to a port whose name or number is greater than the specified name or number

1 of 3

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 221

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

222

Syntax

<port-name>

<port-number> range

Description

Application name or number from the list below.

Rlogin

Rsh

Rtsp

Smtp

Ssh

Ssl

Syslog

Talk

Telnet

Time

Whois

Http

Gopher

Ident

Irc

Klogin

Kshell

Ldap

Nntp

Pop3

Protocol

Bgp

Discard

Dns

Echo

Finger

Ftp

Fp-data

22

443

514

517

513

512

554

25

23

37

43

80

544

389

119

110

70

113

194

543

7

79

21

20

No.

179

9

53

Description

Border Gateway Protocol

Discard

Domain Name Service

Echo

Finger

File Transfer Protocol

FTP data connections

Gopher

Ident

Internet Relay Chat

Kerberos login

Kerberos shell

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

Network News Transport Protocol

Post Office Protocol Version 3 rlogin

Rsh

Real Time Streaming Protocol

Simple Mail Transport Protocol

Secure Shell

Secure Sockets Layer syslog

Talk telnet

Time

Who is

Hyper Text Transfer Protocol

Port number for the port you want to apply the rule. Default is 0.

See table in previous row for number.

Range of ports

2 of 3

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

Syntax

<start port> <end port> not

Description

Range for the port settings. The range is a value from 0 to 65535.

• Default for start port is 0.

• Default for end port is 65535.

Destination TCP port to which this rule is not applied. The rule is applied to all destination TCP ports except for those that you specify with not keyword.

3 of 3

Example:

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# tcp destination-port eq

ftp

Done!

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#

tcp-established

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: IP Rule Table

Use the tcp-established command to specify that the current rule applies only to packets that are part of an established TCP session. Use the no form of the command to specify that the current rule applies to any TCP packets.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] tcp-established

Example:

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# tcp-established

Rule protocol changed.

Done!

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 223

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

tcp source-port

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: IP Rule Table

Use the tcp source-port command to set the requested Transmission Control Protocol

(TCP) destination ports to match. The protocol must be set to TCP.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[not] tcp source-port { any | {eq | lt | gt} {<port-name> |

<port-number>} | range <start-port> <end-port> }

Syntax

any

{eq | lt | gt}

Description

Applies the rule to a port with any name or number.

Specifies one of the following:

eq (equal) applies the rule to a port whose name or number matches exactly to the specified name or number

lt (lower than) applies the rule to a port whose name or number is less than the specified name or number

gt applies the rule to a port whose name or number is greater than the specified name or number

1 of 3

224 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

Syntax

<port-name>

Description

Application name or number from the list below.

Rlogin

Rsh

Rtsp

Smtp

Ssh

Ssl

Syslog

Talk

Telnet

Time

Whois

Http

Gopher

Ident

Irc

Klogin

Kshell

Ldap

Nntp

Pop3

Protocol

Bgp

Discard

Dns

Echo

Finger

Ftp

Fp-data

22

443

514

517

513

512

554

25

23

37

43

80

544

389

119

110

70

113

194

543

7

79

21

20

No.

179

9

53

Description

Border Gateway Protocol

Discard

Domain Name Service

Echo

Finger

File Transfer Protocol

FTP data connections

Gopher

Ident

Internet Relay Chat

Kerberos login

Kerberos shell

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

Network News Transport Protocol

Post Office Protocol Version 3 rlogin

Rsh

Real Time Streaming Protocol

Simple Mail Transport Protocol

Secure Shell

Secure Sockets Layer syslog

Talk telnet

Time

Who is

Hyper Text Transfer Protocol

<port-number> range

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Port number for the port you want to apply the rule. Default is 0.

See table in previous row for number.

Range of ports

2 of 3

225

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

Syntax

<start port> <end port> not

Description

Range for the port settings. The range is a value from 0 to 65535.

• Default for start port is 0.

• Default for end port is 65535.

Source TCP port to which this rule is not applied. The rule is applied to all source TCP ports except for those that you specify with not keyword.

3 of 3

Example:

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# tcp source-port eq ftp

Done!

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#

traffic-type

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Ether Type Rule Table

Use the traffic-type command to specify how to match packet types based on traffic types that include all, broadcast, multicast, or broadcast and multicast. Use the no form of this command to restore the default value of all.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] traffic-type {all | broadcast | multicast | broadcastmulticast}

Example:

W310-1(super/ACL 310/ether type rule 21)# traffic=type

multicast

Done!

W310-1(super/ACL 310/ether type rule 21)#

226 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

udp destination-port

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: IP Rule Table

Use the udp destination-port command to set the requested User Datagram

Protocol (UDP) ports to match.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[not] udp destination-port { any | {eq | lt | gt} {<port-name>

| <port-number>} | range <start-port> <end-port> }

Syntax

any

{eq | lt | gt}

Description

Applies the rule to a port with any name or number

Specifies one of the following:

eq applies the rule to a port whose name or number matches exactly to the specified name or number

lt applies the rule to a port whose name or number is less than the specified name or number

gt applies the rule to a port whose name or number is greater than the specified name or number

1 of 3

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 227

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

Syntax

<port-name>

Description

Application name from the list below.

Protocol

Bootpc

Bootps

Discard

Dns

Echo

Ike

NetBios-ns

NetBios-ds

NetBios-ss

Ntp

Rip

Rtsp

Snmp

Snmp-trap

Syslog

Talk

Tftp

Time

Who

554

161

162

514

138

139

123

520

53

7

500

137

No.

68

67

9

517

69

37

Description

Bootstrap protocol for the client

Bootstrap protocol for the server

Discard

Domain Name Service

Echo

Internet Key Exchange

Name Service

Datagram Service

Session Service

Network Time Protocol

Routing Information Protocol

Real Time Streaming Protocol

Simple Network Management Protocol

Simple Network Management Protocol, Traps

System Logger

Talk

Trivial File Transfer Protocol

Time

<port-number> range

Port number that you want to apply the rule. Default is 0. Range for this value is 0 to 65535. See numbers in row above.

Range of ports to which you want to apply the rule.

2 of 3

228 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

Syntax

<start port> <end port> not

Description

Start port and end port range for which you want to apply the rule. The range is a value from 0 to 65535.

• Default for start port is 0.

• Default for end port is 65535.

Destination UDP port to which this rule is not applied. The rule is applied to all destination UDP ports except for those that you specify with not keyword.

3 of 3

Example:

For UDP destination ports:

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# udp destination-port eq

ftp

Done!

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 229

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

udp source-port

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: IP Rule Table

Use the udp source-port command to set the requested User Datagram Protocol (UDP) ports to match.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[not] udp source-port { any | {eq | lt | gt} {<port-name> |

<port-number>} | range <start-port> <end-port> }

Syntax

any

{eq | lt | gt}

Description

Applies the rule to a port with any name or number

Specifies one of the following:

eq applies the rule to a port whose name or number matches exactly to the specified name or number

lt applies the rule to a port whose name or number is less than the specified name or number

gt applies the rule to a port whose name or number is greater than the specified name or number

1 of 3

230 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Syntax

<port-name>

Chapter 10 W310 Policy Commands

Description

Application name from the list below.

Protocol

Bootpc

Bootps

Discard

Dns

Echo

Ike

NetBios-ns

NetBios-ds

NetBios-ss

Ntp

Rip

Rtsp

Snmp

Snmp-trap

Syslog

Talk

Tftp

Time

Who

554

161

162

514

138

139

123

520

53

7

500

137

No.

68

67

9

517

69

37

Description

Bootstrap protocol for the client

Bootstrap protocol for the server

Discard

Domain Name Service

Echo

Internet Key Exchange

Name Service

Datagram Service

Session Service

Network Time Protocol

Routing Information Protocol

Real Time Streaming Protocol

Simple Network Management Protocol

Simple Network Management Protocol, Traps

System Logger

Talk

Trivial File Transfer Protocol

Time

<port-number> range

Port number that you want to apply the rule. Default is 0. Range for this value is 0 to 65535. See numbers in row above.

Range of ports to which you want to apply the rule.

2 of 3

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 231

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

Syntax

<start port> <end port> not

Description

Start port and end port range for which you want to apply the rule. The range is a value from 0 to 65535.

• Default for start port is 0.

• Default for end port is 65535.

Source UDP port to which this rule is not applied. The rule is applied to all source UDP ports except for those that you specify with not keyword.

3 of 3

Example:

For UDP source ports:

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)# udp source-port eq ftp

Done!

W310-1(super/ACL 330/ip rule 21)#

Setting Policy: Example 1

This example shows how to configure a policy to provide exclusive access of a “marketing” server to the marketing user group and an “engineering” server to the engineering user group.

Network Setup:

The following equipment is used.

• W310 with an IP address 192.168.0.5

• Two servers named - Marketing server (192.168.0.15) and Engineering server

(192.168.0.20)

• RADIUS server (optional)

232 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 Setting Policy: Example 1

How To Configure

Step 1. Create and configure the marketing user group on the RADIUS server or W310.

To create the user group on the W310, use the

user-group command.

Step 2. Create and configure the engineering user group on the RADIUS server or

W310.

To create the user group on the W310, use the

user-group command.

Step 3. Create an IP policy:

1 Create an IP policy that has an index number of 301:

W310-1(super)# ip access-control-list 301

W310-1(super/ACL 301)#

2 Name the IP policy server-filter:

W310-1(super/ACL 301)# name server-filter

3 Set the owner of the policy:

W310-1(super/ACL 301)# owner jackt

Step 4. Add rule 101 to IP policy 301. This rule will deny access to the marketing server

by non-marketing users:

1 Add a rule 101 to IP policy 301:

W310-1(super/ACL 301)# ip-rule 101

2 Configure rule 101 to filter packets that are not coming from members of the

marketing user group (identified by policy user group policy-mrkt):

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)#not source-user-group

policy-mrkt

3 Configure rule 101 to filter packets that are destined to the marketing server (IP address of 192.168.0.15):

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)# destination-ip host

192.168.0.15

4 Configure rule 101 to deny packets that match both criteria (packets that are not from members of the marketing group and that also have a destination address of the marketing server).

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)# composite-operation

Deny

5 Exit IP Rule mode:

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)# exit

W310-1(super/ACL 301)#

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 233

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

Step 5. Add rule 102 to IP policy 301. This rule will deny access to the engineering

server by non-engineering users:

1 Add a rule 102 to IP policy 301:

W310-1(super/ACL 301)# ip-rule 102

2 Configure rule 102 to filter packets that are not coming from members of the

engineering user group (identified by policy user group policy-engr):

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)#not source-user-group

policy-engr

3 Configure rule 102 to filter packets that are destined to the engineering server (IP address of 192.168.0.20):

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# destination-ip host

192.168.0.20

4 Configure rule 102 to deny packets that match both criteria (packets that are not from members of the engineering group and that also have a destination address of the engineering server):

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# composite-operation

Deny

5 Exit IP Rule mode:

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# exit

W310-1(super/ACL 301)#

Step 6. Configure a default rule. The default rule applies to packets that do not match any rules in policy 301.

1 Configure a default rule to permit traffic:

W310-1(super/ACL 301)# ip-rule default

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule default)# composite-

operation Permit

Note: Use the show list command to show all three rules for IP policy 301.

234

2 Exit IP Rule mode:

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ ip rule default)# exit

W310-1(super/ ACL 301)# exit

W310-1(super)#

Step 7. Enable IP policy 301 on port number 5:

1 Enter AP-Group Interface mode for AP group group-1:

W310-1(super)# interface AP-Group group-1

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 Setting Policy: Example 2

2 Activate IP policy 301 for traffic coming into the group-1 interfaces from the wireless clients:

W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)# ip access-group 301 in

3 Add port 5 to the group-1 AP Group:

W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)# add-ports 5

This step applies policy 301 to port 5 since you applied policy 301 to the AP Group to which port 5 now belongs.

Note: At this point, all necessary policy configurations are complete. The preceding policy is applied to users logging in from the W110 connected to port 5 on the W310. Users can try pinging the servers to test the accessibility.

Setting Policy: Example 2

This example is similar to

Setting Policy: Example 1

except that more Engineering and

Marketing servers are present in the network.

Network Setup:

The “Engineering” servers are on the 192.168.8.x network and “Marketing” servers on the

192.168.9.x network.

How To Configure:

Step 1. Create and configure user group marketing on the RADIUS server or W310.

To create the user group on the W310, use the

user-group

command.

Step 2. Create and configure user group engineering on the RADIUS server or W310.

To create the user group on the W310, use the

user-group command.

Step 3. Create an IP policy:

1 Create an IP policy that has an index number of 301:

W310-1(super)# ip access-control-list 301

W310-1(super/ACL 301)#

2 Name the IP policy server-filter:

W310-1(super/ACL 301)# name server-filter

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 235

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

3 Set the owner of the policy:

W310-1(super/ACL 301)# owner jackt

Step 4: Add rule 101 to the IP policy 301. This rule will deny access to the marketing

network by non-marketing users:

1 Add rule 101 to IP policy 301.

W310-1(super/ACL 301)# ip-rule 101

2 Configure rule 101 to filter packets that are not coming from members of the marketing user group (identified by policy user group policy-mrkt):

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)# not source-user-group

policy-mrkt

3 Configure rule 101 to filter packets that are destined to the marketing network (IP address of 192.168.9.x):

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)#

destination-ip

192.168.9.0 0.0.0.255

4 Configure rule 101 to deny packets that match both criteria (packets that do not come from members of the marketing group and that also have a destination address of the marketing network).

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)# composite-operation

Deny

5 Exit IP Rule mode for rule 101:

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)# exit

W310-1 (super/ACL 301)#

Step 5: Add rule 102 to the IP policy 301. This rule will deny access to the engineering

network by non-engineering users:

1 Add a rule 102 to IP policy 301:

W310-1(super/ACL 301)# ip rule 102

2 Configure rule 102 to filter packets that are not coming from members of the

engineering user group (identified by policy user group policy-engr):

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# not source-user-group

policy-engr

3 Configure rule 102 to filter packets that are destined to the engineering network (IP address 192.168.8.X):

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# destination-ip

192.168.8.0 0.0.0.255

4 Configure rule 102 to deny packets that match both criteria (packets that are not from members of the engineering group and that also have a destination address of

236 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 Setting Policy: Example 2 the engineering network).

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# composite-operation

Deny

5 Exit IP Rule mode for rule 102:

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# exit

W310-1 (super/ACL 301)#

Step 6. Configure a default rule. The default rule applies to packets that do not match any rules in policy 301.

1 Configure a default rule to permit traffic:

W310-1(super/ACL 301)# ip-rule default

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule default)# composite-

operation Permit

Note: Use the show list command to show all three rules for IP policy 301.

2 Exit IP Rule mode:

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ ip rule default)# exit

W310-1(super/ ACL 301)# exit

W310-1(super)#

Step 7. Enable IP policy 301 on port number 5:

1 Enter AP-Group Interface mode for AP group group-1:

W310-1(super)# interface AP-Group group-1

2 Activate IP policy 301 for traffic coming into the group-1 interfaces from the wireless clients:

W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)# ip access-group 301 in

3 Add port 5 to the group-1 AP Group:

W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)# add-ports 5

This step applies policy 301 to port 5 since you applied policy 301 to the AP Group to which port 5 now belongs.

Note: At this point, all necessary policy configurations are complete. The preceding policy is applied to users logging in from the W110 connected to port 5 on the W310. Users can try pinging the servers to test the accessibility.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 237

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

Setting Policy: Example 3

This example builds on

Setting Policy: Example 1 and

Setting Policy: Example 2 to

demonstrate filtering packets based on geographic location. This example provides access to guest users on networks 192.168.x.x and 66.10.11.x only from the lobby area.

Network Setup:

Same as in

Setting Policy: Example 1

. The W110 in lobby is connected to the W310 ports 5 and 6.

How To Configure:

Step 1: Create a user group for guests:

1 Create a user group named guest:

W310-1(super)# user-group guest

2 Create an AP group named lobby:

W310-1(super)# interface AP-Group lobby

3 Assign policy user group policy-guest to user group guest:

W310-1(super/User group guest)# policy-user-group

policy-guest

4 Allow user group guest to access the W110 in the AP group lobby:

W310-1(super/User group guest)# allowed-ap-list add

lobby

5 Exit User Group mode:

W310-1(super/User group guest)# exit

W310-1(super)#

Step 2: Create an IP policy.

1 Create an IP policy (access control list) that has an index number of 301

W310-1(super)# ip access-control-list 301

W310-1(super/ACL 301)#

238

Step 3. Add rule 101 to the IP policy 301. This rule will allow guests to access the

192.168.x.x subnet:

1 Add rule 101 to IP policy 301:

W310-1(super/ACL 301)# ip-rule 101

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 Setting Policy: Example 3

2 Configure rule 101 to filter packets that are coming from members of the guest user group (identified by policy user group policy-guest)

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)# source-user-group

policy-guest

3 Configure rule 101 to filter packets that are destined to the 192.168.x.x network.

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)# destination-ip

192.168.0.0 0.0.255.255

4 Configure rule 101 to permit packets that match both criteria (packets from members of the guest user group and that also have a destination address of the

192.168.x.x network):

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)# composite-operation

permit

5 Exit IP Rule mode:

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 101)# exit

W310-1(super/ACL 301)#

Step 4. Add rule 102 to IP policy 301. This rule will allow guests to access the 66.10.11.x subnet:

1 Add rule 102 to IP policy 301:

W310-1(super/ACL 301)# ip-rule 102

2 Configure rule 102 to filter packets that are coming from members of the guest user group (identified by policy user group policy-guest)

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# source-user-group

policy-guest

3 Configure rule 102 to filter packets that are destined to the 66.10.11.x network:

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# destination-ip

66.10.11.0 0.0.0.255

4 Configure rule 102 to permit packets that match both criteria (packets from members of the guest user group and that also have a destination of the 66.10.11.x network):

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# composite-operation

permit

5 Exit IP Rule mode:

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 102)# exit

W310-1(super/ACL 301)#

Step 5. Add rule 103 to IP policy 301. This rule will deny guests access to all other networks:

1 Add rule 103 to IP policy 301:

W310-1(super/ACL 301)# ip-rule 103

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 239

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

2 Configure rule 103 to filter packets that are coming from members of the guest user group (identified by policy user group policy-guest)

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 103)# source-user-group

policy-guest

3 Configure rule 103 to deny guests access to all other subnets

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 103)# destination-ip any

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 103)#

composite-operation

Deny

4 Exit IP Rule mode:

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule 103)#

exit

W310-1(super/ACL 301)#

Step 4: Configure a default rule. The default rule applies to packets that do not match

any rules in policy 301.

1 Configure the default rule to permit traffic.

W310-1(super/ACL 301)# ip-rule default

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule default)# composite-

operation Permit

2 Exit IP Rule mode:

W310-1(super/ACL 301/ip rule default)# exit

W310-1(super/ACL 301)# exit

W310-1(super)#

Step 5. Create and enable AP groups group-1 and lobby on the W310:

1 Create an AP group named group-1:

W310-1(super)# interface AP-Group group-1

2 Add ports 1 through 4 to group-1:

W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)# add-ports 1-4

3 Enable IP policy 301 for group-1:

W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)#

ip access-group 301 in

4 Exit AP Group Interface mode for group-1:

W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)#exit

W310-1(super)#

5 Add ports 4 through 5 to lobby AP group:

W310-1(super/AP-Group lobby)# add-ports 4-5

6 Enable IP policy 301 for lobby:

W310-1(super/AP-Group lobby)# ip access-group 301 in

240 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 Setting Policy: Example 4

7 Exit AP Group Interface mode for lobby:

W310-1(super/AP-Group lobby)# exit

W310-1(super)#

Setting Policy: Example 4

This example demonstrates use of the Quality of Service (QoS) policy commands. QoS policies are configured to achieve the following:

• Give priority to a particular user group (for example, Management user group). You can give specific traffic a higher priority by setting or increasing the 802.1p priority and changing the DSCP value.

• Prioritize the traffic stream accessing a particular server, for example, set the 802.1p.

• Change the packet priority and DSCP value based on the current DSCP value.

Configuring a QoS Policy for Incoming Traffic:

Step 1: Create QoS policy 401 to apply to incoming traffic on an interface:

1 Create a QoS policy that has an index number of 401:

W310-1(super)# ip qos-list 401

W310-1(super/QoS 401)#

Step 2. Create composite operation 12 to set the CoS and DSCP values of packets:

1 Create a composite-operation that has an index number of 12:

W310-1(super/QoS 401)# composite-operation 12

2 Configure composite operation 12 to assign packets a CoS value of 7 and a DSCP value of 45.

W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 12)# cos 7

W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 12)# dscp 45

3 Exit Composite Operation mode:

W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 12)#

exit

W310-1(super/QoS 401) #

Step 3. Add rule 105 to QoS policy 401. This rule will apply composite operation 14 to traffic from the user group mgmt:

1 Add a rule 105 to QoS policy 401:

W310-1(super/QoS 401)# ip-rule 105

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 241

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

2 Configure rule 105 to filter packets that are coming from the members of the mgmt user group:

W310-1(super/QoS 401/ip rule 105)# source-user-group

mgmt

3 Apply composite operation 12 to the rule

W310-1(super/QoS 401/ip rule 105)# composite-operation

Op12

4 Exit IP rule mode for rule 105:

W310-1(super/QoS 401/ip rule 105)# exit

W310-1(super/QoS 401)#

Step 4. Add rule 107 to QoS policy 401. This rule will assign a CoS priority of 7 to traffic going to the server at 192.168.0.15:

1 Add a rule 107 to QoS policy 401:

W310-1(super/QoS 401)# ip-rule 107

2 Configure rule 107 to filter packets that are destined to 192.168.0.15:

W310-1(super/QoS 401/ip rule 107)# destination-ip host

192.168.0.15

3 Configure rule 107 to apply a CoS priority to traffic destined to the server at

192.168.0.15. This operation sets the 802.1p priority to 7.

W310-1(super/QoS 401/ip rule 107)# composite-operation

CoS7

4 Exit IP rule mode for rule 107:

W310-1(super/QoS 401/ip rule 107)# exit

W310-1(super/QoS 401)#

Step 5: Create composite operation 13 to change the CoS priority and DSCP value of packets:

1 Create a composite-operation to change the CoS and DSCP values.

W310-1(super/QoS 401)# composite-operation 13

2 Configure composite operation 13 to set the 802.1p priority to 6.

W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 13)# cos 6

3 Configure composite operation 13 to set the DSCP value to 60.

W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 13)# dscp 60

Note: The show composite-operation 13 command shows the configured operation.

242 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 Setting Policy: Example 4

4 Exit Composite Operation mode for operation 13:

W310-1(super/QoS 401/CompOp 13)# exit

W310-1(super/QoS 401)#

Step 6: Add rule 108 to IP policy 401. This rule will trust the incoming DSCP value of all traffic that does not match rule 105 or 107.

1 Add a rule 108 to QoS policy 401:

W310-1(super/QoS 401)# ip-rule 108

2 Configure rule 108 to trust the incoming DSCP value of packets:

W310-1(super/QoS 401/ip rule 108)# composite-operation

trust-dscp

3 Exit IP rule mode for rule 108:

W310-1(super/QoS 401/ip rule 108)# exit

W310-1(super/QoS 401)#

Step 7: Apply composite operation 13 to packets based on their current DSCP value:

1 Apply composite operation 13 to packets that have a DSCP of 25:

W310-1(super/QoS 401)# dscp-table 25

W310-1(super/QoS 401/dscp 25)# composite-operation Op13

2 Exit DSCP Table mode:

W310-1(super/QoS 401/dscp 25)# exit

W310-1(super/QoS 401)#

Configuring a QoS Policy for Outgoing Traffic

Step 1: Create QoS policy 402 to apply to outgoing traffic on the interface:

1 Create a QoS policy that has an index number of 402:

W310-1(super)# ip qos-list 402

W310-1(super/QoS 402)#

Step 2: Create composite operation 12 that sets the CoS and DSCP values of packets.

1 Create a composite operation that has an index number of 12:

W310-1(super/QoS 402)# composite-operation 12

2 Configure composite operation 12 to assign packets a CoS value of 7 and a DSCP value of 45:

W310-1(super/QoS 402/CompOp 14)# cos 7

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 243

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

W310-1(super/QoS 402/CompOp 14)# dscp 45

3 Exit Composite Operation mode:

W310-1(super/QoS 402/CompOp 12)#

exit

W310-1(super/QoS 402) #

244

Step 3: Add rule 105 to QoS policy 402. This rule will apply composite operation 12 to traffic going to members of the mgmt user group:

1 Add rule 105 to QoS policy 402:

W310-1(super/QoS 402)# ip-rule 105

2 Configure rule 105 to filter packets that are destined to members of the mgmt user group:

W310-1(super/QoS 402/ip rule 105)# destination-user-

group mgmt

3 Apply composite operation 12 to packets that match rule 105.

W310-1(super/QoS 402/ip rule 105)# composite-operation

Op12

4 Exit IP rule mode for rule 105:

W310-1(super/QoS 402/ip rule 105)# exit

W310-1(super/QoS 402/ip rule 105)#

Step 4: Add rule 106 to QoS policy 402. This rule will assign a CoS priority of 7 to traffic coming from the server at 192.168.0.15:

1 Add a rule 106 to QoS policy 402:

W310-1(super/QoS 402)# ip-rule 106

2 Configure rule 106 to filter packets that have a source of 192.168.0.15:

W310-1(super/QoS 402/ip rule 106)# source-ip host

192.168.0.15

3 Configure rule 106 to apply a CoS priority to packets from the server at

192.168.0.15. This operation sets the 802.1p priority to 7.

W310-1(super/QoS 402/ip rule 106)# composite-operation

CoS7

4 Exit IP rule mode for rule 106:

W310-1(super/QoS 402/ip rule 106)# exit

W310-1(super/QoS 402)#

Step 5: Create composite operation 13 to change the CoS priority and DSCP value of packets:

1 Create a composite-operation 13.

W310-1(super/QoS 402)# composite-operation 13

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 Setting Policy: Example 4

2 Configure composite operation 13 to set the 802.1p priority to 6.

W310-1(super/QoS 402/CompOp 13)# cos 6

3 Configure composite operation 13 to set the DSCP value to 60.

W310-1(super/QoS 402/CompOp 13)# dscp 60

Note: The show composite-operation 13 command shows the configured operation.

4 Exit Composite Operation mode for operation 13:

W310-1(super/QoS 402/CompOp 13)# exit

W310-1(super/QoS 402)#

Step 6: Add rule 108 to IP policy 402. This rule will trust the incoming DSCP value of all traffic that does not match rule 105 or 106.

1 Add a rule 108 to QoS policy 402:

W310-1(super/QoS 402)# ip-rule 108

2 Configure rule 108 to trust the incoming DSCP value of packets:

W310-1(super/QoS 402/ip rule 108)# composite-operation

trust-dscp

3 Exit IP rule mode for rule 108:

W310-1(super/QoS 402/ip rule 108)# exit

W310-1(super/QoS 402)#

Step 7: Apply composite operation 13 to packets based on their current DSCP value:

1 Apply composite operation 13 to packets that have a DSCP value of 25:

W310-1(super/QoS 402)# dscp-table 25

W310-1(super/QoS 402/dscp 25)# composite-operation Op13

2 Exit DSCP Table mode:

W310-1(super/QoS 402/dscp 25)# exit

W310-1(super/QoS 402)# exit

W310-1(super)#

Step 8: Enable the policy on an interface, for example, interface group-1 as defined in

Example 1:

1 Enter AP-Group Interface mode for group-1:

W310-1(super)# interface AP-Group group-1

2 Enable QoS policy 401 for incoming traffic:

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 245

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)# ip qos-group 401 in

3 Enable QoS policy 402 for outgoing traffic:

W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)# ip qos-group 402 out

4 Exit AP-Group Interface mode:

W310-1(super/AP-Group group-1)# exit

W310-1(super)#

Setting Policy: Example 5

This example shows how to define the policies for the default user group.

Users first try to associate with the user-group information from the RADIUS server. If that fails, the user is associated with the user-group with SSID name. If that information is not available, the user is placed in the user-group default. This is why it is important to configure policies for the default user group. The policy-group for the default user-group is by-ip-

address.

The following policy denies default users access to networks other than the 192.168.8.x network.

Step 1: Create an IP policy:

1 Create an access control list that has an index number of 305:

W310-1(super)# ip access-control-list 305

Step 2. Add rule 101 to IP policy 305. This rule will allow default users to access the

192.168.8.x network only:

2 Add rule 101 to ACL 305:

W310-1(super/ACL 305)# ip-rule 101

3 Configure rule 101 to filter packets that are coming from members of the default user group (by-ip-address is the policy user group for the default user group):

W310-1(super/ACL 305/ip rule 101)# source-user-group by-

ip-address

4 Configure rule 101 to filter packets that are destined to the 192.168.8.x network:

W310-1(super/ACL 305/ip rule 101)#destination-ip

192.168.8.0 0.0.0.255

5 Configure rule 101 to permit packets that match both criteria:

W310-1(super/ACL 305/ip rule 101)# composite-operation

Permit

6 Exit IP Rule mode for rule 101:

W310-1(super/ACL 305/ip rule 101)# exit

246 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 10 Setting Policy: Example 5

Step 2: Add rule 102 to IP policy 305. This rule will prevent default users from

accessing all other networks:

1 Add a rule 102 to IP policy 305:

W310-1(super/ACL 305)# ip-rule 102

2 Configure rule 102 to filter packets that are coming from members of the default user group (by-ip-address is the policy user group for the default user group):

W310-1(super/ACL 305/ip rule 102)# source-user-group by-

ip-address

3 Configure rule 102 to filter packets that have any destination:

W310-1(super/ACL 305/ip rule 102)# destination-ip any

4 Configure rule 102 to deny packets that match both criteria (from the default user group and also have a destination other than the 192.168.8.x network).

W310-1(super/ACL 305/ip rule 102)# composite-operation

Deny

5 Exit IP Rule mode:

W310-1(super/ACL 305/ip rule 102)# exit

W310-1(super/ACL 305)#

Step 3: Configure a default rule 103. The default rule applies to packets that do not

match any rules in policy 305:

1 Configure the default rule to permit traffic:

W310-1(super/ACL 305)# ip-rule 103

W310-1(super/ACL 305/ip rule 103)# composite-operation

Permit

2 Exit IP Rule mode:

W310-1(super/ACL 305/ip rule 103)#

exit

W310-1(super/ACL 305)#

Step 4: Enable IP policy 305 for incoming traffic on AP group lobby:

W310-1(super)# Interface AP-Group lobby

W310-1(super/AP-Group lobby)# ip access-group 305 in

The policy is applied to incoming traffic using the rules defined for policy list 305.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 247

Chapter 10 Policy Commands

248 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

W310 Port Commands

This chapter describes the CLI commands that you use to configure ports on the W310:

clear port mirror

clear port static-vlan

set intermodule port redundancy

set port auto-negotiation-flowcontroladvertisement

set port channel

set port classification

set port disable

set port dot1x initialize

set port dot1x max-req

set port dot1x port-control

set port dot1x quiet-period

set port dot1x re-authenticate

set port dot1x re-authentication

set port dot1x re-authperiod

set port dot1x server-timeout

set port dot1x supp-timeout

set port dot1x tx-period

set port duplex

set port edge admin state

set port enable

set port flowcontrol

set port level

set port mirror

set port name

set port negotiation

set port point-to-point admin status

set port powerinline

set port powerinline priority

set port redundancy {enable | disable}

set port redundancy

set port redundancy-intervals

set port spantree cost

set port spantree disable

set port spantree enable

set port spantree force-protocolmigration

set port spantree priority

set port speed

set port static-vlan

set port trap

set port vlan

set port vlan-binding-mode

set trunk

show intermodule port redundancy

show port

show port auto-negotiation-flowcontroladvertisement

show port channel

show port classification

show port dot1x

show port dot1x statistics

show port edge state

show port flowcontrol

show port mirror

show port point-to-point status

show port redundancy

show port trap

show port vlan-binding-mode

show trunk

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 249

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

clear port mirror

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the clear port mirror command to cancel a port mirror.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: clear port mirror [<source-module/source-port/dest-module/ dest-port>]

Syntax

source-module source-port dest-module dest-port

Description

1

Source port number

1

Destination port number

Example:

W310-1# clear port mirror 1/9/1/10 this command will delete the port mirror entry

- do you want to continue (Y/N)? y

Mirroring packets from port 9 to port 10 is cleared

Related Commands:

• Use the

set port mirror

command to define a port mirroring pair on the switch.

• Use the

show port mirror

command to display mirroring information for the switch.

250 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

clear port static-vlan

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the clear port static-vlan command to unbind a static bound VLAN from a port.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: clear port static-vlan <module/port range> <vlan-id>

Syntax

<module/ port range>

<vlan-id>

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

The VLAN to unbind from the port

Example:

W310-1# clear port static-vlan 10 5

VLAN 5 is unbound from port 10

Related Commands:

Use the set port static-vlan

command to assign static VLANs to ports.

set intermodule port redundancy

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set intermodule port redundancy command to define the unique port redundancy configuration of the switch. To clear the port redundancy configuration, use the set intermodule port redundancy off command.

! You must disable Spanning Tree before you can enable intermodule port redundancy.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 251

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set intermodule port redundancy <module/prim-port> <module/ second-port> {on | off} [<name>]}

Syntax Description

<module/prim-port> 1/Primary port number

<module/secondport>

1/Secondary port number on off

[<name>]

Sets the intermodule redundancy

Clears the redundancy configuration

Name of the redundancy pair (default is intermodule)

! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.

Example:

W310-1# set intermodule port redundancy 1/7 1/12 on

backbone

backbone: port 1/12 is intermodule redundant to port 1/7

Example:

W310-1# set intermodule port redundancy off

Intermodule port redundancy entry deleted.

Related Commands:

Use the

show intermodule port redundancy command to display the

intermodule port redundancy entries.

252 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

set port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-advertisement

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-advertisement command to set the flowcontrol advertisement for a Gigabit port when performing auto negotiation.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-advertisement <module/ port> {no-flowcontrol | asym-tx-only | sym-only | sym-andasym-rx}

Syntax

<module/port> no-flowcontrol asym-tx-only sym-only sym-and-asym-rx

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

The port will advertise no pause capabilities.

The port will advertise asymmetric Tx pause capabilities only.

The port will advertise symmetric pause capabilities only.

The port will advertise both symmetric and asymmetric Rx pause capabilities.

Example:

W310-1# set port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-

advertisement 1/5 asym-tx-only

Port 1/5 pause capabilities was set

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 253

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

set port channel

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port channel command to enable or disable a Link Aggregation Group

(LAG) interface on the switch. To create a LAG, you must specify a LAG name. There is no default name.

You can also add or remove a port from an existing LAG. When adding or removing a port to an existing LAG, type the same LAG-name. All ports in the LAG are configured with the parameters of the first port that is added to the LAG. These parameters include port administrative status, speed, duplex, auto negotiation mode, VLAN ID, tagging mode, binding mode, and priority level.

The ports added to a LAG must belong to the same LAG group.

When adding a port to an existing LAG, type the same LAG name, otherwise you will create a new LAG.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port channel [<port_list>] [on | off] <name>

Syntax

<port_list>

[on | off]

<name>

Description

A list of ports to be aggregated in the format 1/port

on enables the channel for the specified ports

off disables the channel for the specified ports

Channel name

! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.

Example:

W310-1# set port channel 1/5-6,8 on my-channel

Port 1/5 channel mode set to on 1/102

Port 1/6 was added to channel 1/102

Port 1/8 was added to channel 1/102

254 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

Related Commands:

Use the show port channel

command to display Link Aggregation Group (LAG) information for a specific switch or port.

set port classification

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port classification command to set the port classification to either regular or valuable.

Setting a port to valuable means that, if a link failure occurs on the port, a link fault trap can be sent even when the port is disabled and a fast aging operation on the CAM table is performed. This feature is particularly useful for the link/intermodule redundancy application, where you need to be informed of link failures on dormant ports and quickly resume traffic.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port classification <module/port> {regular | valuable}

Syntax Description

<module/port> 1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

{regular | valuable} port classification

Example:

W310-1# set port classification 1/15 valuable

Port 1/19 classification has been changed.

Related Commands:

Use the show port classification

command to display a port’s classification: valuable or regular.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 255

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

set port disable

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port disable command to disable a port or range of ports.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port disable <module/port>

Syntax

<module/port>

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Example:

W310-1# set port disable 1/1

Port 1/1 disabled.

256 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

set port dot1x initialize

Use the set port dot1x initialize command to initialize port dot1x.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port dot1x initialize <module/port>

Syntax

<module/port>

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Example:

W310-1(super)# set port dot1x initialize 1/3 port 1/2 dot1x was initialized

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 257

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

set port dot1x max-req

User level: supervisor

Use the set port dot1x max-req command to set the maximum number of times the port tries to retransmit requests to the Authenticated Station before the session is terminated.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port dot1x max-req <module/port> <count>

Syntax

<module/port>

<count>

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Number of attempts. The valid range is 1 to 10.

Example:

W310-1> set port dot1x max-req 1/2 5

258 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

set port dot1x port-control

Use the set port dot1x port-control command to set the dot1x parameter per port.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port dot1x port-control <module/port> {force-unauthorize | auto | force-authorize}

Syntax Description

<module/port>

{force-unauthorize | auto | forceauthorize}

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

force-unauthorize - the port is always in blocking state

auto - forwarding or blocking state depends on authorization outcome

force-authorize - the port is always in forwarding state

Example:

W310-1(super)# set port dot1x port-control 1/3 force-

authorize

port 1/3 control was set to force-authorize

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 259

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

set port dot1x quiet-period

Use the set port dot1x quiet-period command to set the 802.1x quiet period per port.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port dot1x quiet-period <module/port> <seconds>

Syntax

<module/port>

<seconds>

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Number of seconds. The valid range is 0 to 65535.

Example:

W310-1(super)# set port dot1x quiet-period 1/2 300

260 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

set port dot1x re-authenticate

Use the set port dot1x re-authenticate command to set the port to reauthenticate.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port dot1x re-authenticate <module/port>

Syntax

<module/port>

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Example:

W310-1(super)# set port dot1x re-authenticate 1/2 port 1/2 is not in authenticating process

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 261

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

set port dot1x re-authentication

User level: supervisor

Use the set port dot1x re-authentication command to enable or disable reauthentication per port.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port dot1x re-authentication <module/port> {enable | disable}

Syntax

<module/port>

{enable | disable}

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Enables for disables reauthentication.

Example:

W310-1(super)# set port dot1x re-authentication 1/2 enable port 1/2 re-authenticate was set to enable

262 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

set port dot1x re-authperiod

User level: supervisor

Use the set port dot1x re-authperiod command to set the idle time between reauthentication attempts before the session is terminated.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port dot1x re-authperiod <module/port> <seconds>

Syntax

<module/port>

<seconds>

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Period in seconds. The valid range is 0 to 65535.

Example:

W310-1(super)# set port dot1x re-authperiod 1/2 400

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 263

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

set port dot1x server-timeout

User level: supervisor

Use the set port dot1x server-timeout command to set the time to wait for a reply from the Authentication Server before the session is terminated.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port dot1x server-timeout <module/port> <seconds>

Syntax

<module/port> seconds

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Timeout in seconds. The valid range is 0 to 65535.

Example:

W310-1(super)# set port dot1x server timeout 1/2 400

264 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

set port dot1x supp-timeout

User level: supervisor

Use the set port dot1x supp-timeout command to set the time for the port to wait for a reply from the Authentication Server before the session is terminated.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port dot1x supp-timeout <module/port> <seconds>

Syntax

<module/port>

<seconds>

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Timeout in seconds. The valid range is 0 to 65535.

Example:

W310-1(super)# set port dot1x supp-timeout 1/2 400

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 265

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

set port dot1x tx-period

User level: supervisor

Use the set port dot1x tx-period command to set the time interval between attempts to access the Authenticated Station.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port dot1x tx-period <module/port> <seconds>

Syntax

<module/port>

<seconds>

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Interval in seconds. The valid range is 0-65535.

Example:

W310-1(super)# set port dot1x quiet-period 1/2 5000

266 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

set port duplex

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port duplex command to configure the duplex type of an Ethernet or Fast

Ethernet port or range of ports. You can configure Ethernet and Fast Ethernet interfaces to either full duplex or half duplex.

The duplex status of a port in auto-negotiation mode is determined by auto-negotiation. An error message is generated if you attempt to set the transmission type of auto negotiation Fast

Ethernet ports to half- or full-duplex mode.

! Ports 51, 52 (Gigabit SFP ports) work in Full duplex mode only. An error message is generated if you attempt to change these ports to half-duplex.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port duplex <module/port> {full | half}

Syntax

<module/port> full half

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Set full-duplex transmission

Set half-duplex transmission

Example:

To set port 1 to full duplex:

W310-1# set port duplex 1/1 full

Port 1/1 set to full-duplex.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 267

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

set port edge admin state

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port edge admin state command to set the port as an RSTP edge-port or non-edge-port.

An edge port is not connected to any other bridge. Only edge ports and point-to-point links can rapidly transition to forwarding state.

If you set edge admin state to edge-port, the oper state field of the

show port edge state

command is also set to edge-port. However, if the port receives a BPDU, the oper

state setting changes to non-edge-port. (To receive a BPDU, the port must be connected to a bridge and thus is not an edge port.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port edge admin state <module/port> {edge-port | non-edgeport}

Syntax Description

<module/port>

{edge-port | nonedge-port}

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

The administrative edge port state of the port:

• edge-port

• non-edge port

268

Examples:

W310-1# set port edge admin state 1/1 edge-port port 1/1 edge admin state is set to edge-port

W310-1# set port edge admin state 1/1 non-edge-port port 1/1 edge admin state is set to non-edge-port

Related Commands:

Use the

show port edge state

command to show a port’s administrative and

operational edge state.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

set port enable

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port enable command to enable a port or a range of ports.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port enable <module/port>

Syntax

<module/port>

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Example:

W310-1# set port enable 1/1

Port 1/1 enabled.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 269

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

set port flowcontrol

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port flowcontrol command to set the send/receive mode for flowcontrol frames (IEEE 802.3x or proprietary) for a full duplex port. Each direction (send or receive) can be configured separately.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port flowcontrol {receive | send | all} <module/port> {off

| on | proprietary}

Syntax

receive send all

<module/port> off

Description

Indicates the ability of the port to receive administrative status from a remote device.

Available only for Gigabit Ethernet ports with negotiation set to off.

Indicates the ability of the port to send administrative status to a remote device.

Available only for Gigabit Ethernet ports with negotiation set to off.

Indicates the ability of the port to both send and receive administrative status (symmetric flow control).

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Disables the port from receiving or sending administrative status:

• set port flowcontrol receive <module/ port> off

disables receiving of administrative status.

• set port flowcontrol send <module/port> off disables sending of administrative status.

• set port flowcontrol all <module/port> off

disables both receiving and sending of administrative status.

1 of 2

270 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

Syntax

on proprietary

Description

Enables the port to receive and send administrative status:

• set port flowcontrol receive <module/ port> on enables receiving of administrative status.

• set port flowcontrol send <module/port> on enables sending of administrative status.

• set port flowcontrol all <module/port> on enables both receiving and sending of administrative status.

Flow control for full duplex on 10Base-T and 100Base-T ports.

2 of 2

Example:

W310-1# set port flowcontrol receive 1/1 on

Port 1/1 flow control receive administration status set to on

Related Commands:

Use the show port flowcontrol

command to display flow control information for a port.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 271

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

set port level

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port level command to set the priority of a port or range of ports on the switching bus. Packets traveling through a port set at normal priority are served only after packets traveling through a port set at high priority are served.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port level <module/port> <value>

Syntax

<module/port>

<value>

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Priority (0-7).

Example:

W310-1# set port level 1/1 5

Port 1/1 level set to 5

272 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

set port mirror

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port mirror command to define a port mirroring pair on the switch. Use

the clear port mirror

command to cancel a port mirror.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port mirror source-port <module/port> mirror-port <module/ port> sampling always direction <direction>

Syntax

<module/port>

{rx | both}

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Direction of traffic that you want to mirror:

rx mirrors only incoming traffic.

both mirrors both incoming and outgoing traffic.

Example:

W310-1# set port mirror source-port 1/9 mirror-port 1/10

sampling always direction both

Mirroring both Rx and Tx packets from port 1/9 to port 1/10 is enabled

Related Commands:

• Use the

show port mirror

command to display mirroring information for the switch.

• Use the

clear port mirror

command to cancel a port mirror.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 273

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

set port name

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port name command to configure a name for a port. If you do not specify a name, the port name remains blank.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port name <module/port> [<name>]

Syntax

<module/port>

[<name>]

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Name (up to 16 characters)

! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.

Example:

W310-1# set port name 1/12 arthur

Port 1/12 name set.

274 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

set port negotiation

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port negotiation command to enable or disable the link negotiation protocol on the specified port. This command is available on Fast Ethernet or Gigabit

Ethernet ports.

• When negotiation is enabled, the speed and duplex of the Fast Ethernet ports are determined by auto-negotiation.

• If negotiation is disabled, the user can set the speed and duplex of the Fast Ethernet ports.

For Fiber Gigabit Ethernet ports it can determine the flow control (pause) mode only.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port negotiation <module/port> {enable | disable}

Syntax

<module/port> enable disable

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Enables port negotiation protocol.

Disables port negotiation protocol.

Example:

To disable auto negotiation on port 1:

W310-1# set port negotiation 1/1 disable

Link negotiation protocol disabled on port 1/1.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 275

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

set port point-to-point admin status

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port point-to-point admin status command to specify whether a port is connected to a shared LAN segment or a point-to-point LAN segment. A point-topoint LAN segment is connected to exactly one other bridge (normally with a direct cable between them). Only point-to-point links and edge ports can rapidly transition to forwarding state.

If you set this field to Auto, the switch automatically detects whether the port is connected to a shared link or a point-to-point link. Ports operating in half duplex are set to non-point-topoint, and ports operating in full duplex are set to point-to-point. You can, however, manually set the type of link.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port point-to-point admin status <module/port> {force-true

| force-false | auto}

Syntax

<module/port> force-true force-false auto

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Defines the port as connected to a point-to-point link.

Defines the port as connected to a shared LAN segment.

Automatically detects whether the port is connected to a shared link or a point-to-point link. Ports operating in half duplex are set to non-point-to-point, and ports operating in full duplex are set to point-to-point

If you select this setting, the point-to-point oper state

field of the show port point-to-point status

command displays the link type that is detected.

276 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

Example:

W310-1# set port point-to-point admin status 1/1 force-true port 1/1 point to point admin status is set to force-true

set port powerinline

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port powerinline command to enable or disable the load detection process and power delivery for the port.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port powerinline <module/port> {enable | disable}

Syntax

<module/port> enable disable

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Enables load detection process for port.

Disables load detection process for port.

Example:

W310-1# set port powerinline 1/1-3 enable

Load detection process on ports 1/1-3 is enabled

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 277

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

set port powerinline priority

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port powerinline priority command to configure the priority for powering the port. Possible values are Critical, High, and Low. At power on, all ports are set to Low Priority.

Within each group, the lowest port number has the highest priority. For example, within ports 1 to 8, port 1 has the highest priority although its priority is lower than port 9 which belongs to High priority group.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port powerinline priority <module/port> {low | high | critical}

Syntax

<module/port>

{low | high | critical}

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Priority for powering the port or port range.

Example:

W310-1# set port powerinline priority 1/3 High

Powering priority on port/s 1/3 was set to High

278 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

set port redundancy {enable | disable}

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port redundancy {enable | disable} command to globally enable or disable the port redundancy pairs you have defined. This command does not delete the existing redundancy entries from NVRAM.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port redundancy {enable | disable}

Example:

W310-1# set port redundancy enable

All redundancy schemes are now enabled

Related Commands:

• Use the

set port redundancy

command to define or remove redundancy pairs.

• Use the

show port redundancy

command to display information about the port redundancy pairs defined for the switch.

set port redundancy

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port redundancy command to define or remove redundancy pairs. A port redundancy member can be any port (including LAG logical port) that is not a member of a LAG or another redundancy pair.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 279

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port redundancy <module/prim_port> <module/second_port>

{on | off} [<redundancy_name>]

Syntax Description

<module/prim_port> on off

1/primary port number of redundancy pair. For example, to specify port 1, type 1/1

Enables the redundancy pair.

Disables the redundancy pair.

<module/second_port> 1/secondary port number of redundancy pair. For example, to specify port 1, type 1/1

[<redundancy_name>] Name for the redundancy pair.

! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.

Example:

W310-1# set port redundancy 1/7 1/12 on red1 uplink: Port 1/12 is redundant to port 1/7.

Port redundancy is active - entry is effective immediately

Related Commands:

• Use the

set port redundancy {enable | disable}

command to globally enable or disable the port redundancy pairs you have defined.

• Use the

show port redundancy

command to display information about the port

redundancy pairs defined for the switch.

280 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

set port redundancy-intervals

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port redundancy-intervals command to configure the two timers that control redundancy switchover:

Minimum interval between switchovers—Minimum time (in seconds) between the failure of the primary port link and switchover to the secondary (backup) port.

Switchback interval—Minimum time (in seconds) that the primary port link must be up

(following failure) before the system switches back to the primary port.

If the switchback interval is zero, the system never switches back. If it is one, switchback occurs immediately after the primary port link returns.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port redundancy-intervals <min-time-between-switchovers>

{<switchback-interval> | none}

Syntax Description

<min-time-betweenswitchovers>

Minimum time (in seconds) between the failure of the primary port link and switchover to the secondary (backup) port.

<switchback-interval> Minimum time (in seconds) that the primary port link must be up (following failure) before the system switches back to the primary port.

If the switchback interval is zero, the system never switches back. If it is one, switchback occurs immediately after the primary port link returns.

none The system switches back only if the secondary link fails.

Example:

W310-1# set port redundancy-intervals 100 20

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 281

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

set port spantree cost

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port spantree cost command to set the cost of a port. This value defines which port will be allowed to forward traffic if two ports with different costs cause a loop.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port spantree cost <module/port> {auto | <value>}

Syntax

<module/port> auto

<value>

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Spantree cost is calculated according to the standard

Number representing the cost. The cost level can be set from 1 to

65535 / 200000000 in STP / RSTP, respectively. A lower cost

(lower value) specifies precedence of a port to forward traffic.

Example:

W310-1# set port spantree cost 1/2 4096 port 1/2 spantree cost is 4096

282 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

set port spantree disable

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port spantree disable command to disable the spanning tree mode for specific switch ports.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port spantree disable <module/port>

Syntax

<module/port>

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Example:

W310-1# set port spantree disable 1/1 port 1/1 was disabled on spantree

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 283

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

set port spantree enable

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port spantree enable command to enable the spanning tree mode for specific switch ports.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port spantree enable <module/port>

Syntax

<module/port>

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Example:

W310-1# set port spantree enable 1/1 port 1/1 was enabled on spantree

set port spantree force-protocol-migration

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port spantree force-protocol-migration command to force a bridge port to send out RSTP BPDUs. By forcing a bridge port to send RSTP BPDUs, you can determine whether legacy 802.1D bridges are present on a LAN segment.

If you remove a legacy 802.1D bridge from a segment, other RSTP bridges on the segment cannot detect the removal so they continue sending STP BPDUs. However, if you force a bridge port to send RSTP BPDUs, they trigger other RSTP bridges on the segment to generate RSTP BPDUs again.

If the switch is running common Spanning Tree, this command has no effect.

284 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port spantree force-protocol-migration <module/port>

Syntax

<module/port>

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Example:

W310-1# set port spantree force-protocol-migration 1/1 port 1/1 is forced to send a Rapid spanning tree BPDU

set port spantree priority

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port spantree command to set the Spanning Tree priority of a port. This value defines the priority of a port to be blocked if two ports with the same costs cause a loop.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port spantree priority <module/port> <value>

Syntax

<module/port>

<value>

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Number representing the priority of the bridge. The priority can range from 0 to 24 in increments of 16. 0 indicates high priority and 240 indicates low priority. The default value is 128.

! Priority value 0 will set the port to Root port.

285

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

Example:

W310-1# set port spantree priority 1/4 128 port 1/4 spantree priority is 128

set port speed

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port speed command to configure the speed of a port or range of 10/

100BASE-T ports.

In auto-negotiation mode, the port's speed is determined by auto negotiation. An error message is generated if you attempt to set the speed when auto negotiation is enabled

! This command cannot be executed on ports 51, 52 (Gigabit SFP ports). An error message is generated if you attempt to perform the set port speed command for these ports that can only work at 1000 Mbps speed.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port speed <module/port> {10MB | 100MB | 1GB}

Syntax Description

<module/port>

{10MB | 100MB

| 1GB}

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

10MB – 10 Mbps (Ethernet)

100MB – 100 Mbps (Fast Ethernet)

1GB – 1 Gbps (Gigabit Ethernet)

Example:

To set the speed of port 1 to 100 Mbps

W310-1# set port speed 1/1 100MB

Port 1/1 speed set to 100 Mbps.

286 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

set port static-vlan

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port static-vlan command to assign static VLANs to ports.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port static-vlan <module/port range> <vlan-id>

Syntax

<module/port range>

<vlan-id>

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

ID of VLAN to bind to port.

Example:

W310-1# set port static-vlan 1/4-6 2

VLAN 2 is bound to port 1/4

VLAN 2 is bound to port 1/5

VLAN 2 is bound to port 1/6

Related Commands:

Use the clear port static-vlan

command to unbind a static bound VLAN from a port.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 287

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

set port trap

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port trap command to enable or disable generic SNMP uplink or downlink traps from a port.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port trap <module/port> {enable | disable}

Syntax

<module/port range> enable disable

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Enable uplink/downlink traps.

Disable uplink/downlink traps.

Example:

W310-1# set port trap 1/2 enable

Port 1/2 up/down trap enabled.

288 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

set port vlan

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port vlan command to set the port VLAN ID (PVID). If adding a new

VLAN, the VLAN number must be within the range of 1 to 3071.

! You must define a VLAN before setting a port VLAN ID.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port vlan <vlan_num> <module/port>

Syntax

<vlan_num>

<module/port>

Description

Number identifying the VLAN.

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Example:

To set VLAN 850 to include ports 4 through 7.

W310-1# set port vlan 850 1/4-7

VLAN 850 modified.

VLAN Mod/Ports

---- -----------------------

850 1/4-7

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 289

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

set port vlan-binding-mode

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set port vlan-binding-mode command to define the VLAN binding method used by ports.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set port vlan-binding-mode <module/port range> {static | bindto-configured | bind-to-all}

Syntax Description

<module/port range>

{static | bind-toconfigured | bind-toall}

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

VLAN binding method:

static - the port supports only the VLAN as configured per port.

bind-to-configured - the port supports the VLANs configured on the switch.

bind-to-all - the port supports the all VLANs known to the switch.

Example:

W310-1# set port vlan-binding-mode 1/5-9 static

Set Port vlan binding method:1/5

Set Port vlan binding method:1/6

Set Port vlan binding method:1/7

Set Port vlan binding method:1/8

Set Port vlan binding method:1/9

290 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

set trunk

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set trunk command to configure the VLAN tagging mode of a port. When

VLAN tagging mode is set to dot1q, all frames transmitted from the port are tagged with an

IEEE 802.1Q-compliant tag. This tag identifies the VLAN to which the frame belongs.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set trunk <module/port> {off | dot1q}

Syntax

<module/port> off dot1q

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

Frames transmitted from the port are untagged.

Frames transmitted from the port are tagged with a IEEE

802.1Q-compliant tag.

Example:

W310-1# set trunk 1/3 dot1q

Dot1Q VLAN tagging set on port 1/3.

Related Commands:

Use the show trunk

command to display VLAN tagging information for the switch.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 291

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

show intermodule port redundancy

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show intermodule redundancy command to display the intermodule port redundancy entries.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show intermodule port redundancy

Example:

W310-1> show intermodule port redundancy

Primary-Port : 1/1

Primary-Port status : Disable

Secondary-Port : 1/2

Secondary-Port status : Disable

Related Commands:

Use the

set intermodule port redundancy

command to define the unique port

redundancy configuration of the switch

show port

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show port command to display port status.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show port [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]

Syntax

[<mod_num>[/

<port_num>]]

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.

292 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

Example: to display the status for port 4.

W310-1> show port 4

Port Name Status Vlan Level Neg Dup. Spd. Type

------ ----------- --------- ---- ------ ------- ---- ---- -----------------

1/4 Gregory no link 1 0 enable half 10M 10/100BaseTx Port

Output Fields:

Field

Port

Name

Status

Vlan

Level

Neg

Dup

Speed

Type

Description

Switch number (always 1) and port number

Name of port

Status of the port (connected, no link, disabled)

VLAN ID of the port

Priority of the port (0-7)

The autonegotiation status of the port (enabled, disabled)

Duplex setting for the port (full, half)

Speed setting for the port (10Mbps, 100Mbps, 1000Mbps)

Port type, for example:

• 10/100Base-Tx, 1000Base-SX Port, Link Aggregation Group of

10/100Base-T ports

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 293

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

show port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-advertisement

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the show port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-advertisement command to display the flowcontrol advertisement for a Gigabit port used to perform autonegotiation.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-advertisement

[<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]

Syntax

[<mod_num>[/

<port_num>]]

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.

Example:

W310-1> show port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-

advertisement

Port 1/1 advertises no flow control capabilities.

Port 1/2 advertises no flow control capabilities.

Port 1/3 advertises no flow control capabilities.

294 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

show port channel

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show port channel command to display Link Aggregation Group (LAG) information for a specific switch or port.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show port channel [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]] [info]

Syntax

[<mod_num>[/

<port_num>]]

[info]

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.

Display port information

Example:

W310-1> show port channel

Port Channel Status Channel Name Channel Id

------ --------------- ---------------- ----------------

1/1 on MEIR 1/101

1/2 on MEIR 1/101

1/3 off

1/4 off

1/5 on my-channel 1/102

1/6 on my-channel 1/102

1/7 off

1/8 on my-channel 1/102

W310-1> show port channel 1/3 info

Port Speed Duplex Vlan Port Trunk Vlan

Priority status Binding

------ ------ ------- ----- --------- -------- --------

1/1 10 half 1 0 off static

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 295

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

Related Commands:

Use the

set port channel

command to enable or disable a Link Aggregation Group

(LAG) interface on the switch.

show port classification

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the show port classification command to display a port’s classification: valuable or regular.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show port classification [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]

Syntax

[<mod_num>[/

<port_num>]]

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.

Example:

W310-1> show port classification 1/8

Port Port Classification

------ ---------------------

1/8 regular

W310-1> show port classification 1/9

Port Port Classification

------ ---------------------

1/9 valuable

Related Commands:

Use the

set port classification

command to set the port classification to either

regular or valuable.

296 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

show port dot1x

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show port dot1x command to display all configuration settings of the authenticator port access entity (PAE) and backend authenticator.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show dot1x [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]

Syntax

[<mod_num>[/

<port_num>]]

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.

Example:

W310-1> show port dot1x 1/3

Port Auth BEnd Port Port Re Quiet ReAuth Server Supp Tx Max

Number State State Control Status Auth Priod Priod Tmeout Tmeout Priod Req

------ ------ ------ -------- ------ ---- ----- ------ ------ ------ ----- ---

1/3 Init Init Auto Unauth Disa 60 3600 30 30 30 2

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 297

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

Output Fields:

Field

Port Number

Auth State

298

BEnd Stat

Port Control

Port Status

Description

Always 1/port number

The Port Access Entity state. Possible states include:

• Initialize

• Disconnected

• Connecting

• Authenticating

• Authenticated

• Aborting

• Held

• ForceAuth

• ForceUnauth

The current state od the Backend

Authentication state machine. Possible states include:

• Request

• Response

• Success

• Fail

• Timeout

• Idle

• Init

Port control type.

Valid values include:

• force-authorized

• force-unauthorized

• auto

The current value of the controlled port status.

Possible states include:

• Authorized

• Unauthorized

1 of 2

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Field

Re Auth

Quiet Period

ReAuth Period

Server Tmout

Supp Tmeout

Tx Priod

Max Req

Chapter 11

Description

The state of reauthentication on the port.

Possible states include:

• Enabled - The port connection is reauthenticated after the reAuthPeriod.

• Disabled - The port connection is not reauthenticated. The reAuthPeriod is ignored.

The amount of time, in seconds, between sending authentication requests.

The time, in seconds, after which the port connection should be reauthenticated.

The amount of time, in seconds, the W310 waits for a response from the RADIUS server.

The amount of time, in seconds, before resending authentication requests.

The amount of time, in seconds, in which an authentication request must be answered.

The maximum number of times a request for authentication is sent before timing out.

2 of 2

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 299

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

show port dot1x statistics

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show port dot1x statistics command to display all port dot1x statistics.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show port dot1x statistics [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]

Syntax

[<mod_num>[/

<port_num>]]

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.

Example:

W310-1> show port dot1x statistics 1/1

Port Tx_Req/Id Tx_Req Tx_Total Rx_Start Rx_Logff Rx_Resp/Id Rx_Resp

------ --------- -------- --------- -------- -------- ---------- ---------

1/1 2 5 0 0 0 0 0

Port Rx_Invalid Rx_Len_Err Rx_Total Last_Rx_Frm_Ver Last_Rx_Frm_Src_Mac

------ ---------- ---------- --------- --------------- -------------------

1/1 0 0 0 0 1d-80-00-00-00-00

300 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

show port edge state

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the show port edge state command to show a port’s administrative and operational edge state.

! You can set the administrative edge state of a port to edge port, but if the port receives a

BPDU, the operational state changes to non-edge port. (To receive a BPDU, the port must be connected to a bridge and thus is not an edge port.

The syntax for this command is: show port edge state [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]

Syntax

[<mod_num>[/

<port_num>]]

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.

Example:

W310-1> show port edge state 1/1-2

Port admin state oper state

------- ------------- -------------

1/1 edge-port edge-port

1/2 non-edge-port non-edge-port

Related Commands:

Use the set port edge admin state

command to set the port as an RSTP edge-port or non-edge-port.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 301

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

show port flowcontrol

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show port flowcontrol command to display flow control information for a port.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show port flowcontrol [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]

Syntax

[<mod_num>[/

<port_num>]]

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.

Example:

W310-1> show port flowcontrol 1/4

Port Send-Flowcontrol Receive-Flowcontrol

Admin Oper Admin Oper

------ ----- ---- ----- ----

1/4 off off off off

Output Fields

Field

Port

Send-Flowcontrol-

Admin

Description

1/port number

Send flow-control administration. Possible settings:

• ON indicates that the local port is allowed to send flow control frames to the far end.

• OFF indicates that the local port is not allowed to send flow control frames to the far end.

1 of 2

302 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

Field

Send-Flowcontrol-

Oper

Receive-

Flowcontrol-

Admin

Receive-

Flowcontrol- Oper

Description

Send flow-control operation mode. Possible modes:

• ON indicates that the local port will send flow control frames to the far end.

• OFF indicates that the local port will not send flow control frames to the far end.

Receive flow-control administration. Possible settings:

• ON indicates that the local port will act upon flow control indications if received from the far end.

• OFF indicates that the local port will discard flow control frames if received from the far end.

Receive flow-control operation mode. Possible modes:

• ON indicates that the local port will act upon flow control indications received from the far end.

• OFF indicates that the local port will discard flow control frames received from the far end.

2 of 2

Related Commands:

Use the set port flowcontrol

command to set the send/receive mode for flowcontrol frames (IEEE 802.3x or proprietary) for a full duplex port.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 303

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

show port mirror

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show port mirror command to display mirroring information for the switch.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show port mirror

Example:

W310-1> show port mirror port mirroring

--------------

Mirroring both Rx and Tx packets from port 1/2 to port 1/4 is enabled

W310-1> show port mirror port mirroring

--------------

No ports are mirrored

Related Commands:

• Use the

set port mirror

command to define a port mirroring pair on the switch.

• Use the

clear port mirror

command to cancel a port mirror.

304 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

show port point-to-point status

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show port point-to-point status command to show a port’s administrative and operational point-to-point status.

! If you set the administrative point-to-point status to auto, the operational status is the

link type that is detected. For more information on point-to-point status, see the set port point-to-point admin status

command.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show port point-to-point status [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]

Syntax

[<mod_num>[/

<port_num>]]

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.

Example:

W310-1> show port point-to-point status

Port point-to-point admin state point-to-point oper state

------- ---------------------------- --------------------------

1/1 auto point to point connection

1/2 auto point to point connection

1/3 auto point to point connection

1/4 auto point to point connection

1/5 auto point to point connection

1/6 auto point to point connection

1/7 auto point to point connection

Related Commands:

• Use the

set port point-to-point admin status

command to specify whether a port is connected to a shared LAN segment or a point-to-point LAN segment.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 305

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

show port redundancy

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show port redundancy command to display information about the port redundancy pairs defined for the switch. The Status column displays which of the two redundancy member ports is enabled currently.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show port redundancy

Example:

W310-1> show port redundancy

Redundancy Name Primary Port Secondary Port Status

----------------- -------------- ---------------- ------

-gregory 1/1 1/2 secondary reuven 1/3 1/4 secondary meir 1/6 1/10 primary arie 1/9 1/16 secondary

Port Redundancy global state is enable

Minimum Time between Switchovers: 1

Switchback interval: 3

Related Commands:

• Use the

set port redundancy {enable | disable}

command to globally

enable or disable the port redundancy pairs you have defined.

• Use the

set port redundancy

command to define or remove redundancy pairs.

306 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

show port trap

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show port trap command to display information on SNMP generic link up/ down traps sent for a specific port.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show port trap [<module>[/<port>]]

Syntax

[<mod_num>[/

<port_num>]]

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.

Example:

W310-1> show port trap 4/1

Port 4/1 up/down trap is disabled

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 307

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

show port vlan-binding-mode

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show port-vlan-binding command to display the VLAN binding setting for a port. For a definition of each mode, see the

set port vlan-binding-mode

command.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show port vlan-binding-mode [module[/port]]

Syntax

[<mod_num>[/

<port_num>]]

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.

Example:

W310-1> show port vlan-binding-mode port 1/1 is statically bound port 1/2 is statically bound port 1/3 is statically bound port 1/4 is statically bound port 1/5 is statically bound port 1/6 is statically bound port 1/7 is statically bound port 1/8 is statically bound port 1/9 is statically bound port 1/10 is statically bound

308 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 11

show trunk

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show trunk command to display VLAN tagging information for the switch.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show trunk [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]

Syntax

[<mod_num>[/

<port_num>]]

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.

Example:

W310-1> show trunk 1/1

Port

-----

41/1

41/2

Mode

----off dot1q

Binding modeNative vlan

---------------------------statically bound1 statically bound2

Output Fields:

Field

Port

Mode

Binding mode

Native VLAN

Description

1/port number

Tag status of the port:

dot1q—802.1Q tagging mode

off—clear mode).

Binding mode of the port

Number of the Port VLAN ID (the VLAN to which received untagged traffic will be assigned).

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 309

Chapter 11 W310 Port Commands

Related Commands:

Use the

set trunk command to configure the VLAN tagging mode of a port.

310 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 12

Wireless Authentication and Security Commands

This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure wireless authentication and security. The W310 supports open authentication, WEP encryption, 802.1x authentication, and Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA):

clear dot1x config

dynamic-rekeying-interval

inter-wireless-gateways-secret

security-mode

set dot1x max-req

set dot1x quiet-period

set dot1x re-authperiod

set dot1x server-timeout

set dot1x supp-timeout

set dot1x system-auth-control disable

set dot1x system-auth-control enable

set dot1x tx-period

show dot1x

show dot1x statistics

wep-encryption-key

wep-encryption-key-effective

wep-keys-format

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 311

Chapter 12 Wireless Authentication and Security Commands

clear dot1x config

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Disables dot1x on all ports and restores the default settings.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: clear dot1x config

Example:

W310-1# clear dot1x config

Original Configuration was Restored

dynamic-rekeying-interval

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: SSID

Use the dynamic-rekeying-interval command to set the encryption rekeying interval in seconds for either the 802.1x or WiFi Protected Access (WPA).

Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default value.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] dynamic-rekeying-interval <interval>

Syntax

<interval>

Description

The minimum number of seconds for the rekeying interval is 60 seconds and the maximum is 65535. The default value is 3600.

312

Example:

To set the encryption rekeying interval:

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# dynamic-rekeying-interval

900

W310-1(super/SSID building1)#

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 12

To reset the encryption rekeying interval to the default:

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# no dynamic-rekeying-interval

W310-1(super/SSID building1)#

inter-wireless-gateways-secret

User level: supervisor

Use the inter-wireless-gateways-secret command to set the secret used for the following types of communication.

• gateway-to-gateway and

• gateway-to-LAP communications.

Caution: This command is implemented immediately after you make your entries and press Enter.

Use the [no] form of this command to restore the secret default value.

Syntax:

[no] inter-wireless-gateways-secret <secret> <re-type>

The syntax for this command is:

Syntax

<secret>

<retype>

Description

Secret used in communications between gateways and a gateway to a LAP. This can use up to 32 characters. The secret displays as asterisks.

Retype the secret exactly as you did for the secret parameter. The retyped secret displays as asterisks.

Example:

W310-1(super)# inter-wireless-gateways-secret **** ****

Done!

W310-1(super)#

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 313

Chapter 12 Wireless Authentication and Security Commands

security-mode

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: SSID

Use the security-mode command to configure the security mode type for the wireless network (SSID). If you do not specify a mode, the current security mode for the wireless network is displayed. Use the [no] form of this command to reset the security mode to its default value (none).

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] security-mode {none | dot1x | wep | wpa-psk | wpa}

Syntax Description

{none | dot1x | wep | wpa | wpa-psk}

Configure the security mode for one of the following:

none - no security. This is the default entry.

dot1x - 802.1x security

wpa - WiFi Protected Access (WPA) that calls for 802.1x unique keys

wpa-psk - WiFi Protected Access (WPA) that uses a preshared key (PSK)

wep - Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption keys.

Example:

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# security-mode wep

Done!

W310-1(super/SSID building1)#

314 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 12

set dot1x max-req

User level: supervisor

Use the set dot1x max-req command to set the maximum number of times the port tries to retransmit requests to the Authenticated Station before the session is terminated.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set dot1x max-req <count>

Syntax

<count>

Description

Number of attempts.The range is 1 to 10.

Example:

W310-1(super)# set dot1x max-req 3

Done!

set dot1x quiet-period

User level: supervisor

Use the set dot1x quiet-period command to set the minimal time between authentication attempts.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set dot1x quiet-period <Seconds>

Syntax

<Seconds>

Description

Quiet period in seconds. The range is 0 to 65535.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 315

Chapter 12 Wireless Authentication and Security Commands

Example:

W310-1(super)# set dot1x quiet-period 90

Done!

set dot1x re-authperiod

User level: supervisor

Use the set dot1x re-authperiod command to set the idle time between reauthentication attempts.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set dot1x re-authperiod <Seconds>

Syntax

<Seconds>

Description

Number of seconds. The range is 0 to 65535.

Example:

W310-1(super)# set dot1x re-authperiod 90

Done!

316 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 12

set dot1x server-timeout

User level: supervisor

Use the set dot1x server-timeout command to set the server retransmission timeout period for all ports. This is the maximum time that the port will wait for a reply from the

Authentication Server.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set dot1x server-timeout <Seconds>

Syntax

<Seconds>

Description

Number of seconds. The range is 0 to 65535.

Example:

W310-1(super)# set dot1x server-timeout 90

set dot1x supp-timeout

User level: supervisor

Use the set dot1x supp-timeout command to set the maximum time that the switch will wait for a reply from the Authenticated Station before the session is terminated.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set dot1x supp-timeout <Seconds>

Syntax

<Seconds>

Description

Number of seconds. The range is 0 to 65535.

Example:

W310-1(super)# set dot1x supp-timeout 90

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 317

Chapter 12 Wireless Authentication and Security Commands

set dot1x system-auth-control disable

User level: supervisor

Use the set dot1x system-auth-control disable command to globally disable the Port Based Network Access Control (PBNAC) (802.1x) feature.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set dot1x system-auth-control disable

Example:

W310-1(super)# set dot1x system-auth-control disable dot1x system-auth-control disabled

set dot1x system-auth-control enable

User level: supervisor

Use the set dot1x system-auth-control enable command to globally enable the PBNAC (802.1x) feature.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set dot1x system-auth-control enable

Examples:

• When a RADIUS server is defined:

W310-1(super)# set dot1x system-auth-control enable dot1x system-auth-control enabled

318

• When a RADIUS server is not defined:

W310-1(super)# set dot1x system-auth-control enable

*** Warning : Authentication server ( RADIUS ) is disabled/ not-exist and so,

*** no authentication can be made dot1x system-auth-control enabled

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 12

set dot1x tx-period

User level: supervisor

Use the set dot1x tx-period command to set the time interval between attempts to access the Authenticated Station.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set dot1x tx-period <Seconds>

Syntax

<Seconds>

Description

Number of seconds. The valid range is 0 to 65535.

Example:

W310-1(super)# set dot1x tx-period 90

Done!

show dot1x

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show dot1x command to display the system dot1x capabilities, protocol version, and timer values.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show dot1x

Example:

W310-1> show dot1x mode

PAE Capabilities Authenticator Only

Protocol Version 1 system-auth-control disabled

*** Warning : Authentication server ( RADIUS ) is disabled/not-exist and so,

*** no authentication can be made

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 319

Chapter 12 Wireless Authentication and Security Commands

show dot1x statistics

User level: read-only, read-write, admin.

Use the show dot1x statistics command to display Rx and Tx EAPOL and EAP statistics.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show dot1x statistics

Example:

W310-1> show dot1x statistics

Rx: EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAP EAP EAP

Total Start Logoff Invalid Resp/Id Resp LenError

-------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- --------

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Tx: EAPOL EAP EAP

Total Req/Id Req

-------- -------- --------

0 0 0

wep-encryption-key

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: SSID

Use the wep-encryption-key command to enable or disable encryption for the wireless interface. This entry displays as asterisks.

! Only one SSID in the SSID Table can have more than one WEP encryption key set. For all other SSIDs, you can set only one WEP encryption key and that key must be WEP

Key 1 only.

320 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 12

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: wep-encryption-key <index> <key>

Syntax

<index>

<key>

Description

Encryption Key 1, 2, 3, or 4. The default is 1.

Encryption string. The supported key lengths are:

• Up to five (5) characters for 64 bit

• Up to 13 characters for 128 bit

• Up to 16 characters for 152 bit

Example:

To set an encryption key:

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# wep-encryption-key 3 AAAA

Done!

wep-encryption-key-effective

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: SSID

Use the encryption-key-effective command to indicate which encryption key (0,

1, 2, or 3) to use for wireless data transmission.

Use the [no] form of this command to return the effective encryption key to its default.

Syntax:

[no] wep-encryption-key-effective <index>

Syntax

index

Description

Encryption key (1, 2, 3, or 4) that will be used to encrypt data that is sent via the wireless interface. The default value is 1.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 321

Chapter 12 Wireless Authentication and Security Commands

Example:

To set the encryption key that will be used for wireless transmissions:

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# encryption-key-effective 3

Done!

To set an encryption key to the default of zero (0)

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# no encryption-key-effective

Done!

wep-keys-format

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: SSID

Use the wep-keys-format command to set the WEP key format to Hexadecimal.

Use the [no] form of this command to return the key format to the ASCII default.

Syntax:

[no] wep-keys-format <ascii | hex>

Syntax

ascii hex

Description

• For 64-bit encryption, an encryption key is 5 ASCII characters.

• For 128-bit encryption, an encryption key is 13 ASCII characters.

• For 152-bit encryption, an encryption key is 16 ASCII characters.

• For 64-bit encryption, an encryption key is 10 hexadecimal characters (0-9 and A-F).

• For 128-bit encryption, an encryption key is 26 hexadecimal characters.

• For 152-bit encryption, an encryption key is 32 hexadecimal characters.

322 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Example:

To set the encryption key that will be used for wireless transmissions:

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# wep-keys-format hex

Done!

To set an encryption key to the default of zero (0)

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# no wep-keys-format

Done!

Chapter 12

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 323

Chapter 12 Wireless Authentication and Security Commands

324 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 13

SNMP Commands

This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure SNMP on the W310:

clear snmp trap

set snmp community

set snmp retries

set snmp timeout

set snmp trap

set snmp trap auth

show snmp

show snmp retries

show snmp timeout

clear snmp trap

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the clear snmp trap command to clear an entry from the Simple Network

Management Protocol (SNMP) trap receiver table.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: clear snmp trap {<rcvr_addr> | all}

Syntax

<rcvr_addr> all

Description

IP address or IP alias of the trap receiver (the SNMP management station) to clear

Keyword that specifies every entry in the SNMP trap receiver table

Example:

W310-1# clear snmp trap 192.168.173.42

SNMP trap deleted.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 325

Chapter 13 SNMP Commands

Related Commands:

• Use the

set snmp trap

command to add an entry to the SNMP trap receiver table and to enable or disable the different SNMP traps for a specific receiver.

• Use the

show snmp command to display SNMP information.

set snmp community

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set snmp community command to set or modify the switch’s SNMP community strings.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set snmp community {read-only | read-write | trap} [community string]

Syntax

{read-only | read-write | trap}

[community string]

Description

Access permission of the community string.

Name of the community string. If you do not specify a community string name, the configured community string is cleared.

Example:

W310-1# set snmp community read-only read

SNMP read-only community string set

Related Commands:

Use the

show snmp

command to display SNMP information.

326 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 13

set snmp retries

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set snmp retries command to set the number of retries initiated by the W310

Manager when it tries to send SNMP messages to the switch.

The valid range is 0 to 10. The default setting is 1.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set snmp retries <number>

Syntax

<number>

Description

Number of retries

Example:

W310-1# set snmp retries 10

SNMP retries is set to 10

Related Commands:

Use the show snmp retries

command to display the number of retries initiated by the

W310 Manager when it tries to send SNMP messages to the device.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 327

Chapter 13 SNMP Commands

set snmp timeout

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set snmp timeout command to set the SNMP time-out in seconds. This command is useful for access using the W310 Manager.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set snmp timeout <number>

Syntax

<number>

Description

Timeout in seconds

Example:

W310-1# set snmp timeout 2000 the SNMP Timeout is set to 2000

Related Commands:

Use the

show snmp timeout

command to display the default SNMP time-out in

seconds.

set snmp trap

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set snmp trap command to add an entry to the SNMP trap receiver table and to enable or disable the different SNMP traps for a specific receiver.

First add the trap receiver and then enable or disable the different traps for the receiver.

328 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 13

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set snmp trap <rcvr_addr> set snmp trap <rcvr_addr> {enable | disable} [all | config | fault |...]

Syntax

<rcvr_addr> enable disable all config fault

Description

IP address or IP alias of the system to receive SNMP traps

Activate SNMP traps

Deactivate SNMP traps

(Optional) Specify all trap types

(Optional) Specify the ConfigChange trap from the TRAP-MIB.

(Optional) Specify the Fault trap from the TRAP-MIB.

Example:

To enable SNMP ConfigChange traps to a specific manager:

W310-1# set snmp trap 192.168.173.42 enable config

SNMP config change traps enabled.

Example:

To enable all traps to a specific manager:

W310-1# set snmp trap 192.168.173.42 enable all

SNMP all traps enabled.

Example:

To disable SNMP config traps to a specific manager:

W310-1# set snmp trap 192.168.173.42 disable config

SNMP config traps disabled.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 329

Chapter 13 SNMP Commands

Example:

To add an entry in the SNMP trap receiver table with default:

W310-1# set snmp trap 192.168.173.42

SNMP trap receiver added.

Related Commands:

• Use the

clear snmp trap

command to clear an SNMP trap receiver.

• Use the

show snmp command to display SNMP information.

set snmp trap auth

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set snmp trap auth command to enable or disable the sending of SNMP traps upon SNMP authentication failure.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set snmp trap {enable | disable} auth

Example:

W310-1# set snmp trap enable auth

Authentication trap enabled

Related Commands:

Use the

show snmp

command to display SNMP information.

show snmp

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show snmp command to display SNMP information.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show snmp

330 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 13

Example:

W310-1> show snmp

Authentication trap disabled

Community-Access Community-String

---------------- ---------------read-only public read-write public trap public

Trap-Rec-Address Status Traps Configured

---------------- -------- ----------------

192.138.40.59 Enabled config

fault

trafic_threshold

module_De-Enrollment

module_Enrollment delete_SW_redundancy_entry

create_SW_redundancy_entry

temperature_warning

general_threshold

cam_change

duplicate_ip ip_vlan_violation link_aggregation_connection_fault link_aggregation_connection_return link_aggregation_partial_fault link_aggregation_partial_return link_aggregation_auto_neg_fault link_aggregation_auto_neg_fault_return

delete_lag

create_new_lag

active_policy_list_change policy_access_control_violation

PSU_module_fault

PSU_module_fault_return

fans_module_fault

fans_module_fault_return

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 331

Chapter 13 SNMP Commands

Related Commands:

• Use the

set snmp community

command to set or modify the switch’s SNMP

community strings.

• Use the

set snmp trap command to add an entry to the SNMP trap receiver table

and to enable or disable the different SNMP traps for a specific receiver.

• Use the

set snmp trap auth

command to enable or disable the sending of SNMP traps upon SNMP authentication failure.

show snmp retries

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show snmp retries command to display the number of retries initiated by the

W310 Manager when it tries to send SNMP messages to the device.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show snmp retries

Example:

W310-1> show snmp retries the SNMP Retries Number is 3

Related Commands:

Use the set snmp retries

command to set the number of retries initiated by the W310

Manager when it tries to send SNMP messages to the switch.

332 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 13

show snmp timeout

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show snmp timeout command to display the default SNMP time-out in seconds.

! This command is useful for access using the Device Manager.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show snmp timeout

Example:

W310-1> show snmp timeout the SNMP Timeout is 2000

Related Commands:

Use the set snmp timeout

command to set the SNMP time-out in seconds.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 333

Chapter 13 SNMP Commands

334 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 14

Spanning Tree Commands

This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure the Spanning Tree or Rapid

Spanning Tree protocol on the W310:

set spantree default-path-cost

set spantree disable

set spantree enable

set spantree forward-delay

set spantree hello-time

set spantree max-age

set spantree priority

set spantree tx-hold-count

set spantree version

show spantree

set spantree default-path-cost

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set spantree default-path-cost command to set the version of the spanning tree default path costs that are to be used by this bridge. The default path costs are as follows:

• common-spanning-tree—uses the 16-bit default path costs from IEEE Std. 802.1D-

1998:

— For 10 MB ports, 100

— For 100 MB ports, 19

— For 1 GB ports, 4

— For 10 GB ports, 3

• rapid-spanning-tree—uses the 32-bit default path costs from IEEE Std. 802.1t:

— 10 Mbps port—2,000,000

— 100 Mbps port—200,000

— 1 Gbps port—20,000

— 10 Gbps port—2,500

! The switch must be running Rapid Spanning Tree to use the Rapid Spanning Tree default path costs. If the switch is running common Spanning Tree, it uses the common

Spanning Tree default path costs regardless of default path cost setting.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 335

Chapter 14 Spanning Tree Commands

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set spantree default-path-cost {common-spanning-tree | rapidspanning-tree}

Syntax Description

common-spanningtree

The default path costs from IEEE 802.1D standard.

rapid-spanning-tree The default path costs from IEEE 802.1W standard.

Example:

W310-1# set spantree default-path-cost rapid-spanning-tree

Spanning tree default path costs is set to rapid spanning tree.

Related Commands:

Use then

show spantree command to display spanning-tree information.

set spantree disable

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set spantree disable command to disable Spanning Tree on the switch.

! When you disable Spanning Tree, blocking ports are disabled to prevent loops in the network. To ensure that the disabled ports reflect the current network topology, after you reset the switch, enable STP, or insert a new station, wait 30 seconds before disabling STP.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set spantree disable

336 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 14

Example:

W310-1# set spantree disable success to set spantree to disable

Related Commands:

Use then

show spantree

command to display spanning-tree information.

set spantree enable

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set spantree enable command to enable Spanning Tree on the switch.

! When you disable STP, blocking ports are disabled to prevent loops in the network. As a result, you need to wait 30 seconds before disabling STP if you reset the switch, enable

STP, or insert a new station.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set spantree enable

Example:

W310-1# set spantree enable success to set spantree to enable

Related Commands:

Use then

show spantree

command to display spanning-tree information.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 337

Chapter 14 Spanning Tree Commands

set spantree forward-delay

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set spantree forward-delay command to set the bridge forward delay time parameter. The forward delay time is the time a port takes to change to the forwarding state.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set spantree forward-delay <seconds>

Syntax

<seconds>

Description

The time that is used when transferring the port to forwarding state. Value range is 4 to 30 seconds and must exceed (Bridge

Max Age/2). Recommended value is 15 seconds.

Example:

W310-1# set spantree forward-delay 15 bridge forward delay set to 15.

Related Commands:

Use then

show spantree

command to display spanning-tree information.

338 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 14

set spantree hello-time

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set spantree hello-time command to set the bridge hello time parameter.

The bridge hello time is the time interval (in seconds) between generation of configuration

BPDUs by the root.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set spantree hello-time <seconds>

Syntax

<seconds>

Description

The time interval (in seconds) between generation of configuration BPDUs by the root. Value ranges between 1 to 10 and must not exceed (Bridge-Max-Age/2) – 1.

The recommended value is 2 sec.

Example:

W310-1# set spantree hello-time 2 bridge hello time set to 2.

Related Commands:

Use then

show spantree

command to display spanning-tree information.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 339

Chapter 14 Spanning Tree Commands

set spantree max-age

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set spantree max-age command to set the maximum time in seconds that the bridge retains bridging information.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set spantree max-age <seconds>

Syntax

<seconds>

Description

The maximum time in seconds to keep message information before it is discarded. Value range is 6 to 40. The setting must be between 2 x (Bridge-Hello-Time + 1) and 2 x (Bridge-Forward-

Delay – 1). Recommended value is 20 sec.

Example:

W310-1# set spantree max-age 20 bridge max age is set to 20.

Related Commands:

Use then

show spantree

command to display spanning-tree information.

340 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 14

set spantree priority

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set spantree priority command to set the spanning tree priority parameter.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set spantree priority <number>

Syntax

<number>

Description

The priority of the Spanning Tree. The valid range is from 0 to

61440 in increments of 4096. 0 indicates high priority and 61440 indicates low priority. The default setting is 32768.

Example:

W310-1# set spantree priority 4096

Bridge priority set to 4096.

Related Commands:

Use then

show spantree

command to display spanning-tree information.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 341

Chapter 14 Spanning Tree Commands

set spantree tx-hold-count

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set spantree tx-hold-count command to limit the maximum number of

BPDUs transmitted during a hello-time period.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set spantree tx-hold-count <rate>

Syntax

<rate>

Description

Value between 1 to 10; recommended value is 3

Example:

W310-1# set spantree tx-hold-count 3 tx hold count is set to 3.

Related Commands:

Use then

show spantree

command to display spanning-tree information.

set spantree version

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the set spantree version command to set the version of Spanning Tree that you want the switch to run: Common Spanning Tree or Rapid Spanning Tree.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set spantree version <version>

Syntax

<version>

Description

common-spanning-tree – compatible with IEEE 802.1D standard.

rapid-spanning-tree – compatible with IEEE 802.1W standard

342 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Example:

W310-1# set spantree version rapid-spanning-tree

Spanning tree version is set to rapid spanning tree.

Related Commands:

Use then

show spantree

command to display spanning-tree information.

Chapter 14

show spantree

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use then show spantree command to display spanning-tree information.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show spantree [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]

Syntax

[<mod_num>[/

<port_num>]]

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 343

Chapter 14 Spanning Tree Commands

Example:

W310-1> show spantree

Spanning tree state is enabled

Designated Root: 00-40-0d-8c-88-ff

Designated Root Priority: 32768

Designated Root Cost: 100

Designated Root Port: 1/7

Root Max Age: 20 Hello Time: 2

Root Forward Delay: 15

Bridge ID MAC ADDR: 00-40-0d-b9-89-ff

Bridge ID priority: 32768

Bridge Max Age: 20 Bridge Hello Time: 2

Bridge Forward Delay: 15 Tx Hold Count 3

Spanning Tree Version is rapid spanning tree

Spanning Tree Default Path Costs is according to common spanning tree

Port State Cost Priority

------ ------------- ---------- ------------

1 /1 not-connected 19 128

1 /2 not-connected 19 128

1 /3 LAG-member 19 128

1 /4 LAG-member 19 128

1 /5 not-connected 19 128

1 /6 not-connected 19 128

1 /8 not-connected 19 128

1 /9 not-connected 19 128

1 /10 not-connected 19 128

1 /11 not-connected 19 128

344 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 14

Output Fields:

Field Description

Spanning tree

Designated Root

Designated Root

Priority

Designated Root

Cost

Designated Root

Port

Root Max Age

Hello Time

Status of whether Spanning-Tree Protocol is enabled or disabled

MAC address of the designated spanning-tree root bridge

Priority of the designated root bridge

Total path cost to reach the root

Port through which the root bridge can be reached (shown only on nonroot bridges)

Amount of time that a BPDU packet is valid

Number of times the root bridges sends BPDUs.

Root Forward Delay This time value, measured in units of hundredths of a second, controls how fast a port changes its spanning state when moving towards the Forwarding state.

Bridge ID MAC

ADDR

Bridge MAC address used in the sent BPDUs

Bridge ID Priority

Bridge Max Age

Bridge Hello Time

Bridge Forward

Delay

Tx Hold Count

Bridge priority

The value that all bridges use for MaxAge when this bridge is acting as the root.

The value that all bridges use for HelloTime when this bridge is acting as the root.

The value that all bridges use for ForwardDelay when this bridge is acting as the root.

Spanning Tree

Version

Spanning Tree

Default Path Costs

The value used by the Port Transmit state machine to limit the maximum transmission rate.

The version of Spanning Tree Protocol the bridge is currently running

The version of the Spanning Tree default Path Costs that are to be used by this Bridge.

1 of 2

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 345

Chapter 14 Spanning Tree Commands

Field

Port

State

Cost

Priority

Description

Port number

Spanning-tree port state (disabled, inactive, not-connected, blocking, listening, learning, forwarding, bridging, or type-pvidinconsistent)

Cost associated with the port

Priority associated with the port

2 of 2

Related Commands:

• Use the

set spantree default-path-cost

command to set the version of the

spanning tree default path costs that are to be used by this bridge.

• Use the

set spantree disable

command to disable Spanning Tree on the switch.

• Use the

set spantree enable

command to enable Spanning Tree on the switch.

• Use the

set spantree forward-delay command to set the bridge forward

delay time parameter.

• Use the

set spantree hello-time

command to set the bridge hello time

parameter.

• Use the

set spantree max-age command to set the maximum time in seconds

that the bridge retains bridging information.

• Use the

set spantree priority

command to set the spanning tree priority parameter.

• Use the

set spantree tx-hold-count

command to limit the maximum number of BPDUs transmitted during a hello-time period.

• Use the

set spantree version

command to set the version of Spanning Tree that

you want the switch to run: Common Spanning Tree or Rapid Spanning Tree.

346 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 15

SSID Commands

This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure service set identifiers

(SSIDs):

broadcast

closed-system

dynamic-rekeying-interval

dynamic-rekeying-interval

security-mode

show ssid

ssid

ssid2lap

vlan

wep-encryption-key

wep-encryption-key-effective

broadcast

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: SSID

Use the broadcast command to enable or disable a broadcast service set identifier (SSID) for the wireless network. This is done in response to a broadcast SSID probe request where a station is actively seeking an Access Point. The default for this command is disabled. Use the

[no] form of this command to return to its default value.

! When broadcast is enabled to transmit an SSID through its broadcast beacon, you must also set the Closed System parameter to accept-any.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] broadcast <transmit | not-transmit>

Syntax

transmit not-transmit

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Description

Enables a broadcast SSID for the wireless network.

Disables a broadcast SSID for the wireless network.

347

Chapter 15 SSID Commands

Example:

To enable broadcast:

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# broadcast transmit

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

W310-1(super/SSID building1)#

To disable broadcast:

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# broadcast not-transmit

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

W310-1(super/SSID building1)#

Related Commands:

Use the

show ssid

command to display the W310 SSID parameters.

closed-system

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: SSID

Use the closed-system command to enable or disable a closed system for the wireless network. Enable only one Service Set Identifier (SSID). The default for this command is enabled.

Use the [no] form of this command to return to the default value.

! You must disable closed system (accept-any) whenever you enable broadcast to transmit the SSID through its broadcast beacon.

348 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 15

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] closed-system <accept-any | not-accept-any>

Syntax

accept-any not-accept-any

Description

Disables closed system by accepting any SSID.

Enables closed system by accepting only one SSID.

Example:

To disable a closed system:

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# closed-system accept-any

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

W310-1(super/SSID building1)#

To enable a closed system:

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# closed-system not-accept-any

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

W310-1(super/SSID building1)#

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 349

Chapter 15 SSID Commands

dynamic-rekeying-interval

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: SSID

Use the dynamic-rekeying-interval command to set the encryption rekeying interval in seconds for either the 802.1x or WiFi Protected Access (WPA).

Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default value.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] dynamic-rekeying-interval <interval>

Syntax

<interval>

Description

The minimum number of seconds for the rekeying interval is 60 seconds and the maximum is 65535. The default value is 3600.

Example:

To set the encryption rekeying interval:

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# dynamic-rekeying-interval

900

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

W310-1(super/SSID building1)#

To reset the encryption rekeying interval to the default:

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# no dynamic-rekeying-interval

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

W310-1(super/SSID building1)#

350 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 15

security-mode

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: SSID

Use the security-mode command to configure the security mode type for the wireless network (SSID). If you do not specify a mode, the current security mode for the wireless network is displayed. Use the [no] form of this command to reset the security mode to its default value (none).

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] security-mode {none | dot1x | wep | wpa}

Syntax Description

{none | dot1x | wep | wpa}

Configure the security mode for one of the following:

none - no security. This is the default entry.

dot1x - 802.1x security

wpa - WiFi Protected Access (WPA) that calls for 802.1x unique keys

wep - Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption keys.

Example:

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# security-mode wep

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

W310-1(super/SSID building1)#

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 351

Chapter 15 SSID Commands

show ssid

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Root, SSID, LAP

Use the show ssid command to display:

• W310 SSID parameters and the associated Light Access Points (LAPs) (SSID mode), or

• W310 SSID parameters for the specified LAP (LAP mode).

Syntax:

show ssid [<lap-name>]

Syntax Description

No parameters used.

• In SSID mode, displays the W310 SSID table and parameters and the associated LAPs.

• In LAP mode, displays the W310 SSID table and parameters for the specified LAP.

[<lap-name>] Name assigned to the Light Access Point (LAP). This will display only the specified LAP’s SSID table and parameters.

352 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 15

Example:

To show the W310 SSID table and parameters:

W310-1(super)# show-ssid

----------------------------------------------------------

SSID Name | BC | Cls | Scrty | Eff |Re-Key | VLAN | Acc

| | | | WEP |Interval| |VLAN

---------------------------------------------------------default off off none 2 3600 by UG off lobby off off none 1 3600 by UG off

SSID LAP List Table

-----------------------------------------------------------------

SSID Name | LAP |Slot

----------------------------------------------------------------default none lobby port-02 first

port-05 first

port-06 first

W310-1(super)#

To show the W310 SSID Table and a specific W110 (LAP) parameters:

W310-1(super)# show-ssid port-02

----------------------------------------------------------

SSID Name | BC | Cls | Scrty | Eff |Re-Key | VLAN | Acc

| | | | WEP |Interval| |VLAN

---------------------------------------------------------default off off none 2 3600 by UG off lobby off off none 1 3600 by UG off

LAP port-02 SSID List Table

-----------------------------------------------------------------

SSID Name | Slot

----------------------------------------------------------------lobby first

port-05 first

port-06 first

W310-1(super)#

Related Commands:

Use the

broadcast command to enable or disable a broadcast service set identifier (SSID)

for the wireless network.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 353

Chapter 15 SSID Commands

ssid

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the ssid command to create a Service Set Identifier (SSID) or enter SSID command mode. This is the wireless SSID name. If you do not specify a name, a list of SSID names is displayed.

Use the [no] form of this command to delete SSID entries.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] ssid <name>.

Syntax

<name>

Description

Enter the name you want to assign to the wireless network. This string can be up to 32 characters.

Note: When you delete an SSID entry, the entry is also deleted from all Light Access Points.

Message:

After this command is initiated, the LAP must reboot for any change to this setting to take effect. The following message displays after you initiate this command:

This command will reboot the LAP(s). Do you want to continue (Y/N)?

• Type Y to reboot the LAP.

• Type N to cancel the reboot. The change in this setting will not take effect.

Example:

W310-1(super)# ssid building1

W310-1(super/building1)#

354 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 15

ssid2lap

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Root, SSID, LAP

Use the ssid2lap command to set the Service Set Identifier (SSID) for a specified Light

Access Point (LAP) or do not specify any LAP name to associate to all LAPs.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: ssid2lap [lap-name] [lap-name] .... [lap-name]

Syntax

lap-name

Description

Specify one or more LAPs for which you want to set the SSID. If you do not specify a LAP name, then the SSID is set to all LAPs.

Example:

W310-1(super)# ssid2lap

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 355

Chapter 15 SSID Commands

vlan

User level: supervisor

Command Mode: User Group, SSID

Use the vlan command to set the SSID or user group’s virtual local area network (VLAN).

By default, the VLAN equals the gateway management interface.

Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default value.

Note: The VLAN identifiers are available through the network administrator/planner.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] vlan <vlan> [accessible] | by-user-group-table

Syntax Description

<vlan> VLAN identifier. By default, the VLAN equals the gateway’s management interface. The range is from 1 to 3072. The default value is 1 for the management interface.

accessible VLAN is forwarded to all W310s.

by-user-group-table VLAN is derived from the user group table.

Example:

In the User Group mode:

W310-1(super/User group system)# vlan 8

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

W310-1(super/User group system)#

356 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

In the SSID mode:

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# vlan 8

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

W310-1(super/SSID building1)#

Chapter 15

wep-encryption-key

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: SSID

Use the wep-encryption-key command to enable or disable encryption for the wireless interface. This entry displays as asterisks.

Use the command no wep-keys-format to reset the encryption keys to its default format.

Syntax:

[no] wep-encryption-key <index> <key>

Syntax

<index>

<key>

Description

Encryption Key 1, 2, 3, or 4. The default is 1.

Encryption string. The supported key lengths are:

• Up to five (5) characters for 64 bit

• Up to 13 characters for 128 bit

• Up to 16 characters for 152 bit

Example:

To set an encryption key:

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# wep-encryption-key 3 AAAA

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 357

Chapter 15 SSID Commands

To set an encryption key to the default:

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# no wep-keys-format

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

wep-encryption-key-effective

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: SSID

Use the encryption-key-effective command to indicate which encryption key (0,

1, 2, or 3) to use for wireless data transmission.

Use the [no] form of this command to return the effective encryption key to its default.

Syntax:

[no] wep-encryption-key-effective <index>

Syntax

index

Description

Encryption key (1, 2, 3, or 4) that will be used to encrypt data that is sent via the wireless interface. The default value is 1.

Example:

To set the encryption key that will be used for wireless transmissions:

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# wep-encryption-key-effective

3

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

358 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 15

To set an encryption key to the default of zero (0)

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# no encryption-key-effective

This command will reboot the LAP(s) - do you want to continue (Y/N)?

Done!

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 359

Chapter 15 SSID Commands

360 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 16

System Commands

This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure the W310 on a system level:

clear timezone

configure

dir

get time

hostname

nvram initialize

reset

reset powerinline

set boot bank

set bups power

set license

set queuing scheme

set system contact

set system location

set system name

set time client

set time protocol

set time server

set timezone

set web aux-files-url

set welcome message

show boot bank

show bups power

show download status

show image version

show license

show module

show module-identity

show powerinline

show queuing scheme

show system

show tftp download software status

show time

show time parameters

show timezone

show web aux-files-url

sync time

tech

tree

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 361

Chapter 16 System Commands

clear timezone

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the clear timezone command to reset the time zone to its default value UTC

(Coordinated Universal Time)

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: clear timezone

Example:

W310-1# clear timezone

Timezone name and offset cleared.

Related Commands:

• Use the

set timezone

command to set the time zone for the switch and set the time

difference of the device relative to the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC / GMT).

• Use the

show timezone

command to display the current W310 time zone.

configure

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the configure command to enter configure mode.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: configure

Example:

W310-1# configure

W310-1#

362 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 16

dir

Use the dir command to show the file types that have been downloaded to the switch.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: dir [module_number]

Syntax

module_number

Description

1

Example:

W310-1> dir

M# file ver num file type file location file description

-- ---- -------- ---------- ------------- ----------------

1 Booter_Image 3.5.17 SW BootImage Nv-Ram Booter Image

1 module-config N/A Running Conf Ram Module Configuration

1 EW_Archive N/A SW Web Image Nv-Ram Web Download

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 363

Chapter 16 System Commands

Output Fields:

Field

M# file ver num file type file location file description

Description

The switch number (always 1)

There are several files loaded into the switch’s memory:

module-config—Contains the configuration settings made to this switch

stack-config—Contains the configuration settings made at the stack level (for example IP address of the stack)

EW_Archive—Contains the Device Manager (Embedded

Web) software

! If N/A is displayed for the EW_Archive file, the Device

Manager software is not loaded correctly. Download the

Device Manager software again.

Booter_Image—Contains the booter code executed after reset. You cannot replace by this file.

startup-config—Contains the startup (saved in NVRAM) configuration for policy and routing in the W310

running-config—Contains the running (currently active) configuration for policy and routing in the W310

S/W Version number—Relevant only for Device Manager and

Booter image.

There are several file types:

Running Conf—The configuration currently in use.

Startup-config—Startup configuration for policy and routing in the W310

SW boot image—Booter file

SW Web Image—Device Manager software archive file

Type of internal memory in which the file is stored

Description of the file

364 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 16

get time

Use the get time command to retrieve the time from the network.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: get time

Example:

W310-1# get time

Time is being acquired from server 0.0.0.0

Time has been acquired from the network.

hostname

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the hostname command to change the Command Line Interface (CLI) prompt. The number 1 always appears at the end of the prompt.

Use the no hostname command to restore the default CLI prompt.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] hostname [<hostname_string>]

Syntax Description

[<hostname_string>] • none – displays current hostname

• string – the string to be used as the hostname (up to 20 characters).

! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.

Examples:

W310-1# hostname

Session hostname is ‘W310’

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 365

Chapter 16 System Commands

W310-1# hostname gregory gregory-N# gregory-N# no hostname

W310-1#

nvram initialize

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the nvram initialize command to reset the configuration parameters to their factory defaults.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: nvram initialize {switch | all}

Syntax

switch all

Description

Resets all the Layer 2 switching parameters

Not applicable

Example:

W310-1# nvram initialize

This command will restore factory defaults, and can disconnect your telnet session

*** Reset *** - do you want to continue (Y/N)? y

Connection closed by foreign host

366 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 16

reset

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the reset command to restart the W310 switch.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: reset [<module number>]

Syntax

<module number>

Description

1

Example:

To reset the switch:

W310-1# reset

This command will force a switch-over to the master module and disconnect your telnet session.

Do you want to continue (y/n) [n]? y

Connection closed by foreign host.

reset powerinline

! This command is not applicable.

set boot bank

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set boot bank command to configure the software bank from which the switch will boot at the next boot process.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set boot bank {bank-a | bank-b}

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 367

Chapter 16 System Commands

Example:

W310-1# set boot bank bank-a

Boot bank is set to bank-a

Related Commands:

Use the

show boot bank

command to display the software bank from which the switch

will boot at the next boot process.

set bups power

Not applicable.

set license

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set license command to activate the SMON capabilities of an Avaya W310 switch. One SMON license is required per Avaya W310.

For a full description of the SMON License and the installation procedure, see the

Installation Guide provided with the License.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set license <module> <license> <feature name>

Syntax

<module>

<license>

<feature name>

Description

1

License number

Name of the feature

368

Example:

W310-1# set license 1 021 1ad bad ca5 8d2 ccd smon

Related Commands:

Use the

show license command to display the current licenses installed on the switch.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 16

set queuing scheme

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set queuing scheme command to set the queuing scheme to either strict or weighted round robin and to set the weights.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set queuing scheme {wrr {H:M:N:L} | strict | default} [module]

Syntax

{wrr {H:M:N:L} | strict | default}

[module]

Description

Queuing scheme:

wrr—Weighted Round Robin

H:M:N:LQ—ratio between priority queues. Enter the ratio in the format of High:Medium:Normal:Low.

Strict—Strict

Default—default

Not applicable

Example:

W310-1# set queuing scheme strict

Queuing scheme is set to strict

W310-1# set queuing scheme wrr 8

Queuing scheme is set to wrr 8

Related Commands:

Use the show queuing scheme

command to display the current queuing scheme settings.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 369

Chapter 16 System Commands

set system contact

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the set system contact command to set the mib2 system contact MIB variable.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set system contact [<string>]

Syntax

[<string>]

Description

• The contact name string should be typed inside quotation marks (“”).

• Omitting this variable clears the contact name.

Example:

W310-1(super)# set system contact “gregory kohll”

*** Set system contact *** system contact set

set system location

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the set system location command to set the mib2 system location MIB variable

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set system location [<string>]

370

Syntax

[<string>]

Description

• The location name string should be typed inside quotation marks (“”).

• Omitting this variable clears the location name.

! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 16

Example:

W310-1# set system location “tech-support”

*** Set system location *** system location set

set system name

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set system name command to set the mib2 system name MIB variable.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set system name [<string>]

Syntax

[<string>]

Description

• The system name string should be typed inside quotation marks (“”).

• Omitting this variable clears the system name.

! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.

Example:

W310-1# set system name “W310-1”

*** Set system name *** system name set

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 371

Chapter 16 System Commands

set time client

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set time client command to enable or disable the periodic network time acquisition by the switch from the network time server (SNTP or TIME protocol).

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set time client {enable | disable}

Syntax

enable disable

Description

Enable periodic network time acquisition

Disable periodic network time acquisition

Example:

W310-1# set time client enable

Time client mode enabled

Related Commands:

Use the

show time parameters

command to display the time status and parameters.

372 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 16

set time protocol

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set time protocol command to set the time protocol for the switch to use:

SNTP or TIME.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set time protocol {sntp-protocol | time-protocol}

Syntax

sntp-protocol time-protocol

Description

Use the SNTP protocol

Use the TIME protocol

Example:

W310-1# set time protocol sntp-protocol

The protocol has been set to SNTP protocol

W310-1# set time protocol time-protocol

The protocol has been set to TIME protocol

Related Commands:

Use the show time parameters

command to display the time status and parameters.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 373

Chapter 16 System Commands

set time server

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set time server command to set the TIME server address.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set time server <ip address>

Syntax

<ip address>

Description

IP address of the TIME server.

Example:

W310-1# set time server 192.49.53.68

The Server Ip has been set to 192.49.53.68

Related Commands:

Use the

show time parameters

command to display the time status and parameters.

set timezone

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set timezone command to set the time zone for the switch and set the time difference of the device relative to the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC / GMT).

The minutes parameter can be set only to 30.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set timezone <zone-name> {<hours> | <hours:min>}

Syntax

<zone-name>

<hours>

Description

Three-character name of time zone, for example, EST, GMT

The difference between the time zone and GMT

374 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 16

Example:

W310-1# set timezone EST -5

Timezone set to ’EST’, offset from UTC is -5 hours.

Related Commands:

• Use the

clear timezone

command to reset the time zone to its default value UTC

(Coordinated Universal Time)

• Use the

show time

command to display the current W310 time and time zone.

• Use the

show time parameters

command to display the time status and parameters.

• Use the

show timezone

command to display the current W310 time zone.

set web aux-files-url

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set web aux-files-url command to allow the Device Manager to automatically locate the URL of the Web server containing the Device Manager help files and Java plug-in.

! Ensure that the Web server is always accessible to prevent potential delays in Web access to the device.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set web aux-files-url <//IP address/directory name>

! To define a directory name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.

Example:

W310-1# set web aux-files-url //192.168.47.25/emweb-aux-

files

Related Commands:

Use the

show web aux-files-url

command to display the URL/directory from where the switch can access the Device Manager auxiliary files (for example help files).

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 375

Chapter 16 System Commands

set welcome message

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set welcome message command to set a welcome message to appear after a reboot.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set welcome message [<string>]

Syntax

[<string>]

Description

The string to be used as the welcome message.

Omitting this variable restores the default welcome message.

! To define a string that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire string in quotation marks, for example, “new york”.

Example:

W310-1# set welcome message avaya

The new welcome string is "avaya"

show boot bank

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show boot bank command to display the software bank from which the switch will boot at the next boot process.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show boot bank

Example:

W310-1> show boot bank

Boot bank set to bank-a

376 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 16

Related Commands:

Use the set bups power

command to configure the software bank from which the switch will boot at the next boot process.

show bups power

Not applicable.

show download status

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show download status command to display a summary of the last software download operation.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show download status [<module_number>]

Syntax Description

[<module_number>] 1

Example:

W310-1> show download status 1

Mod Bank Download State Activity Status Download Size

----- ------ --------------- ---------------- ---------------

1. Bank B idle Download idle 0

Mod Version Host File

----- --------- ------------- ------------------

1. 3.5.18 149.49.70.61 d:\p340sw\gt-ml\3.5.18\p332gt_ml

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 377

Chapter 16 System Commands

show image version

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show image version command to display the software version of the image on both memory banks.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show image version [<mod_num>]

Syntax

[<mod_num>]

Description

1

Example:

W310-1> show image version

Mod Module-Type Bank Version

------ ----------- ---- -------

1 Cayenne16 board A 0.0.0

1 Cayenne16 board B 90.0.29

show license

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show license command to display the current licenses installed on the switch.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show license

Example:

W310-1> show license

Mod Application License Key State Feature Flag

--- ------------------- ----------------------------- ---------- ---------

1 smon 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 licensed 1

378 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 16

Related Commands:

Use the

set license

command to activate the SMON capabilities of an Avaya W310 switch.

show module

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show module command to display switch status and information.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show module [<mod_num>]

Syntax

[<mod_num>]

Description

1

Example:

W310-1> show module

Mod Type C/S S/N Statuses

--- ------------------ ---- -------- ----------------------------

1 Cayenne16 0.0 1234567 PS:AC Fans:Ok Mode:Cayenne

NoCascade Conn-Up:None Conn-Down:None

BUPS BUPS:Not Prsnt Power:800 Watts

Output Fields

Field

Mod

Type

C/S

S/N

Statuses

Description

Switch number (always 1)

Switch type

Hardware Configuration Symbol of the switch

Serial number of the switch

Status of the switch and BUPS

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 379

Chapter 16 System Commands

show module-identity

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show module-identity command to display the switch identity, which is required for acquiring a license.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show module-identity [<module>]

Syntax

[<module>]

Description

1

Example:

W310-1> show module-identity

Mod Module Identity

--- ---------------

1 1234567

380 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 16

show powerinline

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show powerinline command to display the current status of the power delivery (PD) inline power on all ports.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show powerinline [<mod_num>[/<port_num>]]

Syntax

[<mod_num>[/

<port_num>]]

Description

1/port number or range of port numbers. To specify a range of ports, use a hyphen between the two port numbers. For example:

• To specify port 1, type 1/1

• To specify ports 1 to 5, type 1/1-5

If you do not specify a number, all ports are displayed.

Example:

W310-1> show powerinline 1

External power supply is 800 Watts.

External power is not active

Actual power consumption is 0 W.

Port Inline

Operational

Status

----

1/1

1/2

1/3

1/4

...

----------on on on off

Powering

Priority

--------

Low

Low

High

High

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 381

Chapter 16 System Commands

Example:

W310-1> show powerinline 1/1

External power supply is 800 Watts.

External power is not active

Actual power consumption is 0 W.

Port Inline

Operational

Status

----

1/1

----------off

Powering

Priority

--------

Low

show queuing scheme

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show queuing scheme command to display the current queuing scheme settings.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show queuing scheme

Example:

W310-1> show queuing scheme

Queuing scheme: default

Related Commands:

Use the

set queuing scheme

command to set the queuing scheme to either strict or

weighted round robin and to set the weights.

382 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 16

show system

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show system command to display the up time, system name, location, and contact person.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show system

Example:

W310-1> show system

Uptime d,h:m:s

------------------------

0,2:40:55

System Name System Location System Contact

--------------------- ------------------------- ---------------------

W310_version-1.0.5 R&D Gregory Kohll

Switch MAC address

------------------

00 40 0d 8a 04 b4

show tftp download software status

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show tftp download software status commands to display the status of the current TFTP Device Manager software (Embedded Web) download process into the device.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show tftp download status [<mod_num>]

Syntax

[<mod_num>]

Description

1

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 383

Chapter 16 System Commands

Example:

W310-1> show tftp download status

Module #1

===========

Module : 1

Source file : d:\p340sw\gt-ml\3.5.18\p340.web

Destination file : EW_Archive

Host : 149.49.70.61

Running state : Writing ...

Failure display : (null)

Last warning : No-warning

show time

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show time command to display the current W310 time and time zone.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show time

Example:

W310-1> show time

10:32:34 27 JAN 2000 GMT

Related Commands:

• Use the

set time client

command to enable or disable the periodic network time acquisition by the switch from the network time server.

• Use the

set time protocol

command to set the time protocol for the switch to

use.

• Use the

set time server

command to set the TIME server address.

• Use the

set timezone

command to set the time zone for the switch and set the time

difference of the device relative to the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC / GMT).

• Use the

show time parameters

command to display the time status and

parameters.

384 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 16

show time parameters

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show time parameters command to display the time status and parameters.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show time parameters

Example:

W310-1> show time parameters

Client status: Enabled

Current time : L:00:57:19 01 JAN 1970 GMT

Timezone set to 'GMT', offset from UTC is 0 hours

Time-Server : 0.0.0.0 (I.e. broadcast address)

Time acquired from Time-Server: 0.0.0.0

Time protocol set to : TIME protcol

Related Commands:

• Use the

set time client

command to enable or disable the periodic network time acquisition by the switch from the network time server.

• Use the

set time protocol

command to set the time protocol for the switch to use.

• Use the

set time server

command to set the TIME server address.

• Use the

set timezone

command to set the time zone for the switch and set the time

difference of the device relative to the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC / GMT).

show timezone

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show timezone command to display the current W310 time zone.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show timezone

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 385

Chapter 16 System Commands

Example:

W310-1> show timezone

Timezone set to 'GMT', offset from UTC is 0 hours

Related Commands:

• Use the

clear timezone command to reset the time zone to its default value UTC

(Coordinated Universal Time)

• Use the

set timezone

command to set the time zone for the switch and set the time

difference of the device relative to the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC / GMT).

• Use the

show time parameters command to display the time status and

parameters.

show web aux-files-url

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show web aux-files-url command to display the URL/directory from where the switch can access the Device Manager auxiliary files (for example help files).

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show web aux-files-url

Example:

W310-1> show web aux-files-url the web aux-files-url is 149.49.36.212/W310test

Related Commands:

Use the

set web aux-files-url

command to allow the Device Manager to automatically locate the URL of the Web server containing the Device Manager help files and Java plug-in.

386 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 16

sync time

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the sync time command to synchronize the time used.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: sync time

Example:

W310-1> sync time

Time has been distributed.

tech

! This command is reserved for service personnel use only.

Use the tech command to enter tech mode.

tree

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the tree command to display a list of CLI commands available at the current user level.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: tree [<depth>]

Syntax

[<depth>]

Description

Depth of tree output.

If you do not enter a value, the entire tree is displayed.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 387

Chapter 16 System Commands

Example:

W310-1(super)# tree session terminal width terminal length no hostname no username no ip telnet-client no ip telnet no ip icmp redirect no ip http no ip access-group no ip access-list no rmon history no rmon alarm no rmon event hostname clear screen clear timezone clear ip route clear snmp trap clear logging server clear logging file clear cam clear log

--type q to quit or space key to continue--

388 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 17

CLI User Interface Commands

This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure the CLI user interface:

clear screen

help

prompt-length

retstatus

set logout

set terminal recovery password

show logout

show timeout

terminal

clear screen

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the clear screen command to clear the current terminal display.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: clear screen

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 389

Chapter 17 CLI User Interface Commands

help

Use the help command to display a list of all commands at the current level. If a command is specified and has no further sub-commands, the help for that command is displayed. If the command has a sub-command, a brief description of the sub-command is displayed.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: help [<command> [<subcommand>...]]

Example:

W310-1> help username

Username commands:

----------------------------------------------------------

Usage: username <name> password <passwd> access-type {readonly|read-write|admin}

prompt-length

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the prompt-length command to specify the length of the default CLI prompt.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: prompt-length {full | <prompt-size>}

Syntax

full

<prompt-size>

Description

Display the full length of the prompt

Set the length in characters of the prompt to display

Example:

W310-1(super)# prompt-length 4

~r)#

390 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 17

retstatus

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the retstatus command to display the return status of the previously executed command.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: retstatus

Example:

W310-1# retstatus

Succeeded

set logout

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set logout command to set the time in minutes before the system automatically disconnects an idle session. The default setting is 15 minutes.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set logout [<timeout in minutes>]

Syntax

[<timeout in minutes>]

Description

Time until the system automatically disconnects an idle session.

• Setting the value to 0 disables the automatic disconnection of idle sessions

• Default value is 15 minutes

• Omitting the <timeout in minutes> variable restores the default setting.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 391

Chapter 17 CLI User Interface Commands

Example:

• To set the time until the system disconnects an idle session automatically to 20 minutes:

W310-1# set logout 20

Sessions will be automatically logged out after 20 minutes of idle time.

• To disable the automatic disconnection of idle sessions:

W310-1# set logout 0

Sessions will not be automatically logged out.

Related Commands:

Use the show timeout

command to display the time in minutes that the CLI can remain idle before timing out. If set to 0, there is no time-out limit

set terminal recovery password

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the set terminal recovery password enable command to enable or disable the recovery password feature.

! This command can be run only from the console port on the device.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set terminal recovery password {enable | disable}

Example:

W310-1# set terminal recovery password enable

Done!

392 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 17

show logout

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show logout command to display the amount of time the CLI remains idle before timing out in minutes.

If set to 0, there is no time-out limit. The default is 15 minutes.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show logout

Example:

W310-1# show logout

CLI timeout is 10 minutes

show timeout

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show timeout command to display the time in minutes that the CLI can remain idle before timing out. If set to 0, there is no time-out limit. The default is 15 minutes.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show timeout

Example:

W310-1> show timeout

CLI timeout is 10 minutes

Related Commands:

Use the set logout command to set the time in minutes before the system automatically

disconnects an idle session.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 393

Chapter 17 CLI User Interface Commands

terminal

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the terminal width and terminal length commands to set the width and length of the terminal display in characters.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: terminal {width | length} [<characters>]

Syntax

width length

[<characters>]

Description

Width of display (line length). The default is 80.

Length of display (number of lines). The default is 24.

The number of characters.

Example:

W310-1> terminal width 80 terminal width: 80

394 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 18

User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands

This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure users, user groups, and

RADIUS user authentication on the W310:

allowed-ap-list

clear radius authentication server

home-gateway

policy-user-group

set radius authentication

set radius authentication retry-number

set radius authentication retry-time

set radius authentication secret

set radius authentication server

set radius authentication udp-port

set radius secret

show

show radius authentication

show user group table

show username

show users profile

user-group

vlan

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 395

Chapter 18 User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands

allowed-ap-list

User level: supervisor

Command Mode: user group

Use the allow-ap-list command to specify the allowed Access Points to access on the wireless network. The Access Point (AP) Group is also called the policy enforcement point

(PEP). Use the [no] form of this command for all allowed AP Groups.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] allowed-ap-list {any | {{add | remove} <ap-groups>}}

Syntax

{add | remove} any

<ap-groups>

Description

Add or remove an AP Group from the allowed AP list.

Any allows any AP Group.

Name of the AP group that you want to add or remove from the list of allowed APs. A zero (0) entry means access to this list is denied.

Example:

To enter an allowed list of APs for a user group:

W310-1(super/User group building1)# allowed-ap-list remove

engineering

Done!

W310-1(super/User group building1)#

To add an AP Group to a user group:

W310-1(super/User group building1)# allowed-ap-list add

lobby conference-rooms

Done!

W310-1(super/User group building1)#

396 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 18

Related Commands:

Use the

show user group table

command to show the user group table attributes and default-user-group.

clear radius authentication server

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the clear radius authentication server command to remove a primary or secondary RADIUS authentication server.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: clear radius authentication server {primary | secondary}

Syntax

primary secondary

Description

Remove primary RADIUS server

Remove secondary RADIUS server

Example:

W310-1(super)# clear radius authentication server secondary

Related Commands:

Use the set radius authentication server

command to set the IP address

(and shared secret) of the primary or secondary RADIUS Authentication server.

• Use the

show radius authentication

command to display all RADIUS

authentication settings.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 397

Chapter 18 User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands

home-gateway

User level: supervisor

Command Mode: user group

Use the home-gateway command to set the user group’s home gateway. Use the [no] form of this command to reset the home gateway to its default.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] home-gateway <ip-address>

Syntax

<ip-address>

Description

Home gateway IP address(es) for the user group. The default value of 00.00.00.00 is a dynamic home gateway assignment, for example, the current W310 is the home gateway.

Example:

To set the home gateway IP address for a user group:

W310-1(super/User group building1)# home-gateway

149.48.88.97

Done!

W310-1(super/User group building1)#

To return to the default home gateway IP address for a user group:

W310-1(super/User group building1)# no home-gateway

Done!

W310-1(super/User group building1)#

Related Commands:

• Use the

user-group

command to create a user group or enter User Group command

mode.

• Use the

show user group table

command to show the user group table attributes and default-user-group.

398 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 18

policy-user-group

User level: supervisor

Command Mode: user-group

Use the policy-user-group command to change the user group ID that associates a policy with a specific user group. The default policy user group (user group ID) is the same name as the user group itself.

After you define the policy user group, you can apply a policy to source traffic from the user group by using the source-user group <policy-user-group-name> command. Or you can apply the policy to destination traffic from the user group by using the destination-user-group <policy-user-group-name>

command.

Use the [no] form of this command to reset the policy user group to its default.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] policy-user-group <policy-name>

Syntax

<policy-name>

Description

Enter the policy name to apply to the user-group. The name can be up to 32 characters. The default policy uses the same name as the user group.

Example:

To assign a policy to a user group:

W310-1(super/User group building1)# policy-user-group

system

Done!

W310-1(super/User group building1)#

To return to the default policy user group:

W310-1(super/User group building1)# no policy-user-group

system

Done!

W310-1(super/User group building1)#

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 399

Chapter 18 User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands

Related Commands:

• Use the

show user group table

command to show the user group table attributes

and default-user-group.

• Use the

source-user-group command to set the source policy user group name.

• Use the

destination-user-group

command to set the destination policy user

group name to match.

set radius authentication

User level: supervisor

Use the set radius authentication command to enable or disable RADIUS authentication for the W310 switch.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set radius authentication {enable | disable}

Syntax

enable disable

Description

Enable RADIUS authentication

Disable RADIUS authentication (default)

Example:

W310-1(super)# set radius authentication enable

Related Commands:

Use the

show radius authentication

command to display all RADIUS authentication settings.

400 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 18

set radius authentication retry-number

User level: supervisor

Use the set radius authentication retry-number to set the number of times the switch sends an access request when there is no response.

The valid range is 0 to 10. The default setting is 1.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set radius authentication retry-number <number>

Syntax

<number>

Description

Number of retries

Example:

W310-1(super)# set radius authentication retry-number 3

Related Commands:

Use the

show radius authentication

command to display all RADIUS

authentication settings.

set radius authentication retry-time

User level: supervisor

Use the set radius authentication retry-time command to set the time that the switch waits before resending an access request.

The valid range is 1 to 30. The default setting is 7 seconds.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set radius authentication retry-time <seconds>

Syntax

<seconds>

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Description

Retry time in seconds.

401

Chapter 18 User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands

Example:

W310-1(super)# set radius authentication retry-time 5

Related Commands:

Use the

show radius authentication command to display all RADIUS

authentication settings.

set radius authentication secret

User level: supervisor

Use the set radius authentication secret command to enable secret authentication for the W310 switch.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set radius authentication secret [string]

Syntax

[string]

Description

password

Example:

W310-1(super)# set radius authentication secret hush

Related Commands:

Use the

show radius authentication

command to display all RADIUS

authentication settings.

402 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 18

set radius authentication server

User level: supervisor

Use the set radius authentication server command to set the IP address (and shared secret) of the primary or secondary RADIUS Authentication server.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set radius authentication server <ip-addr> <shared secret>

{primary | secondary}

Syntax

<ip-addr> primary secondary

Description

IP address of the RADIUS authentication server default - Primary authentication server

Secondary authentication server

Example:

W310-1(super)# set radius authentication server

192.40.12.36 secret primary

Related Commands:

• Use the

clear radius authentication server

command to remove a primary or secondary RADIUS authentication server.

• Use the

show radius authentication

command to display all RADIUS

authentication settings.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 403

Chapter 18 User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands

set radius authentication udp-port

User level: supervisor

Use the set radius authentication udp-port command to set the RFC 2138 approved UDP port number for RADIUS authentication.

Normally, the UDP port number should be set to its default value of 1812. Some early implementations of the RADIUS server used port number 1645.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set radius authentication udp-port <number>

Example:

W310-1(super)# set radius authentication udp-port 300

Related Commands:

Use the

show radius authentication

command to display all RADIUS

authentication settings.

set radius secret

User level: supervisor

Use the set radius secret command to set the RADIUS shared secret.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: set radius secret [string]

Syntax

[string]

Description

password

Example:

W310-1(super)# set radius secret hush

404 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Related Commands:

Use the show radius authentication

command to display all RADIUS authentication settings.

Chapter 18

show

User level: supervisor

Command Mode: user group

Use the show command to show the user group table attributes and default user-group.

Syntax:

show

Example:

W310-1(super/User group engineering)# show

User group: engineering

Policy user group: by ip address

Home mobility gateway: 0.0.0.0

User group vlan: 1

No allowed Apg List

Done!

W310-1(super/User group engineering)#

show radius authentication

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show radius authentication command to display all RADIUS authentication settings.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show radius authentication

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 405

Chapter 18 User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands

Example:

W310-1> show radius authentication

RADIUS authentication parameters:

---------------------------------

Mode: Enabled

Primary-server: 192.168.42.252

Secondary-server: 192.168.48.134

Retry-number: 4

Retry-time: 5

UDP-port: 1645

Shared-secret: sodot

Related Commands:

• Use the

set radius authentication

command to enable or disable RADIUS authentication for the W310 switch.

• Use the

set radius authentication retry-number

to set the number of

times the switch sends an access request when there is no response.

• Use the

set radius authentication retry-time

command to set the time that the switch waits before resending an access request.

• Use the

set radius authentication secret

command to enable secret authentication for the W310 switch.

Use the set radius authentication server

command to set the IP address

(and shared secret) of the primary or secondary RADIUS Authentication server.

• Use the

set radius authentication udp-port

command to set the RFC

2138 approved UDP port number for RADIUS authentication.

• Use the

set radius secret

command to set the RADIUS shared secret.

show user group table

User level: supervisor

Command Mode: Root, User Group

Use the show user group table command to show the user group table attributes and default-user-group.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show user group table

406 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 18

Example:

W310-1# show-user-group-table

----------------------------------------------------------

User group | Policy group | Home gateway | vlan |

---------------------------------------------------------default by ip address 10.20.6.2(D) 1

Allowed Apg List: all

Done!

Related Commands:

• Use the

allowed-ap-list command to specify the allowed Access Points to access

on the wireless network.

• Use the

home-gateway

command to set the user group’s home gateway.

Use policy-user-group

to associate a policy name to a group of users.

• Use the

user-group

command to create a user group.

show username

User level: supervisor

Use the show username command to display the local user accounts.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show username

Example:

W310-1(super)# show username

User account password access-type

----------------------------- --------------------------- -------root ***** admin gkohll ***** read-only readwrite ***** read-write

Related Commands:

Use the username

command to add a local user account.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 407

Chapter 18 User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands

show users profile

User level: supervisor

Use the show users profile command to show a users list and the following user attributes:

• user group name,

• username,

• MAC address,

• ip address,

• policy user group name,

• allowed Access Points (APs),

• current AP group associated to,

• home gateway IP address,

• dynamic or static home gateway,

• vlan,

• EAP type,

• master session key lifetime

• physical port

This command is filtered by either the MAC or IP address with mask.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show users profile [ip <ip-address> | mac <mac>] [wildcard

<wildcard>] [user <all-users | home-gateways-users | foreign- gateway-users>] [lap <lap-name>] [vlan <vlan>]

408

Syntax

<ip-address>

<mac>

<wildcard>

Description

Filter by the IP address.

Filter by the MAC address with mask.

The range of IP addresses of the rule.

The zero bits in the wildcard correspond to bits in the IP address that remain fixed. The one bits in the wildcard correspond to bits in the IP address that can vary. Note that this is the opposite of how bits are used in a netmask.

1 of 2

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 18

Syntax

all-users, home-gatewayusers, or foreign-gatewayusers

<lap-name>

<vlan>

Description

Select to display all users or home or foreign users.

all-users displays both home and foreign users

home-gateway-users is where the “home” user roamed, this displays the user’s current (foreign) gateway.

foreign-gateway-users is where the “foreign” user roamed, this displays the user’s home gateway.

The Light Access Point (LAP) name for which you want to display user attributes.

Filter the display by Virtual LAN (VLAN) selection.

2 of 2

Example:

W310-1(super)# show users profile ip 10.10.10.10

User account password access-type

------------------------------- -------------------------------- -------root ***** admin twriter ***** read-only readwrite ***** read-write

user-group

User level: supervisor

Use the user-group command to create a user group or enter User Group command mode. The total number of user groups allowed is 256. Use the [no] format of this command to delete a user group.

Note: Configure the users that belong the user group on the RADIUS server.

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 409

Chapter 18 User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] user-group <name>

Syntax

name

Description

• Name of the user-group you want to create. The string can be up to 32 characters. The number of user groups is limited to

256 entries. The default user group is “default”.

• To enter User Group command mode for an existing user group, enter the name of the user-group.

Example:

To create a user group or enter User Group mode for an existing user group:

W310-1(super)# user-group system

W310-1(super/User group system)#

To remove a user-group:

W310-1> W310-1(super/User group system)# no user-group

system

W310-1> Done!

W310-1> W310-1(super)#

Related Commands:

Use the

home-gateway

command to set the user group’s home gateway.

Use the

show user group table

command to show the user group table attributes and default-user-group.

Use the

show users profile

command to show a users’ list and their profiles.

410 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 18

username

User level: supervisor

Use the username command to add a local user account.

! By default a single user account is configured. The user name for this default user account is root, the password is root, and the access type is administrator. You cannot delete this default user account, nor can you modify its access level. You can, however, modify its password.

Use the no username <name> command to remove a local user account.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: username <name> password <passwd> access-type {read-only | read-write | admin}

Syntax

<name>

<passwd> access-type {read-only | read-write | admin}

Description

New user name (minimum four characters)

! To define a name that includes spaces, you must enclose the entire name in quotation marks, for example “new york”.

User’s password (minimum four characters)

Access type definition:

• read only

• read-write or

• administrator

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 411

Chapter 18 User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands

Example:

W310-1(super)# username john password johnny access-type

read-write

User account added.

W310-1(super)# username root password secret access-type

read-write

ERROR: User account root has always an administrator access type.

W310-1(super)# username root password secret access-type

admin

User account modified.

Example:

W310-1(super)# no username john

User account removed.

vlan

User level: supervisor

Command Mode: User Group, SSID

Use the vlan command to set the SSID or user group’s virtual local area network (VLAN).

By default, the VLAN equals the gateway management interface.

Use the [no] form of this command to restore the default value.

Note: The VLAN identifiers are available through the network administrator/planner.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] vlan <vlan> [accessible] | by-user-group-table

412 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 18

Syntax Description

<vlan> VLAN identifier. By default, the VLAN equals the gateway’s management interface. The range is from 1 to 3072. The default value is 4094 for the management interface.

accessible VLAN is forwarded to all W310s.

by-user-group-table VLAN is derived from the user group table.

Example:

In the User Group mode:

W310-1(super/User group system)# vlan 8

Done!

W310-1(super/User group system)#

In the SSID mode:

W310-1(super/SSID building1)# vlan 8

Done!

W310-1(super/SSID building1)#

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 413

Chapter 18 User, User Group, and RADIUS Commands

414 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 19

Wireless Domain Commands

This chapter describes the commands that you use to configure a wireless domain for the

W310:

show wireless domain parameters

wireless-domain-servers

wireless-domain-secret

show wireless domain parameters

User level: user, privileged, supervisor

Use the show wireless domain parameters to display the wireless domain general attributes:

• domain name

• domain master server

• domain backup server

• domain active server

• SpectraLink support

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: show wireless domain parameters

Example:

W310-1(super)# show wireless domain parameters

Master Server: 192.54.2.10

Backup Server: 192.54.4.12

Active Server: 192.54.2.10

Domain: N/A

Spectralink: not supported

IP Multicast Over The Air: supported

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 415

Chapter 19 Wireless Domain Commands

Related Commands:

Use the wireless-domain-servers command to set the master and backup servers in

addition to a wireless domain name.

wireless-domain-servers

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Use the wireless-domain-servers command to set the master and backup servers in addition to a wireless domain name.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is: wireless-domain-servers <master-ip-address> [<backup-ipaddress> <domain-name>]

Syntax

master-ip-address

<backup-ipaddress>

<domain-name>

Description

IP address of the master mobility server.

IP address of the backup (redundant) mobility server.

Name for the domain. This is usually a cluster of W310 switches that allows roaming. Use up to 64 characters.

Example:

W310-1# wireless-domain-servers 192.168.49.75

192.168.49.88 R&D

Done!

Related Commands:

Use the

show wireless domain parameters

to display the wireless domain

general attributes.

416 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Chapter 19

wireless-domain-secret

User level: privileged, supervisor.

Command Mode: Root

Use the wireless-domain-secret command to set the secret that is used in a gateway-to-gateway and gateway-to-Light Access Point (LAP) communication. The W310 has a predefined secret. When you type and retype in a secret, the secret appears as asterisks.

Use the [no] form of this command to return to the default secret.

Syntax:

The syntax for this command is:

[no] wireless-domain-secret <secret> <retype-secret>

Syntax

<secret>

<retype-secret>

Description

Secret for gateway-to-gateway and gateway-to-LAP communication. Enter a string of up to 32 characters. The W310 has a default secret.

Retype the secret exactly as you did the first time.

Example:

W310-1# wireless-domain-secret r6vte 3

Done!

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 417

Chapter 19 Wireless Domain Commands

418 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Index of CLI Commands

A

add-ports

9

allowed-ap-list

396

apply-template

88

assoc-response-timeout

89

automatic-channel-selection-band

90

B

beacon-period 91

broadcast 217

, 347

C

change-lap-name

92

channel-frequency

93

clear cam

68

clear log

146

clear logging file 147

clear logging server

147

clear port mirror

250

clear port static-vlan

251

clear radius authentication server

397

clear rmon statistics

148

clear screen

389

clear snmp trap

325

clear statistics

98

clear utilization cpu

148

clear vlan 68

clear-policy-statistics

181

closed-system

348

composite-operation

182

configure 362

cookie

185

copy mobility-startup tftp

14

copy module-config tftp 16

copy running-config tftp 17

copy stack-config tftp

18

copy startup-config tftp

19

copy tftp EW_Archive 20

copy tftp LAP_image

21 ,

100

copy tftp mobility-startup

22

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

copy tftp module-config 23

copy tftp policy-startup 24

copy tftp stack-config

25

copy tftp startup-config

26

copy tftp SW_image

27

copy tftp SW_powerinline_image

29

copy tftp wireless-gateway-startup 30

copy wireless-gateway-running tftp 31

copy wireless-gateway-startup tftp 33

D

delete-ports 10

destination-ip

187

destination-user-group

188

dir

363

dscp 189

dscp-table

190

dtim-period 101

dynamic-rekeying-interval

312 ,

350

E

erase startup-config

33

ether-type

190

ether-type-rule

191

ether-type-simulate

192

F

fragmentation-threshold

102

G

get time

365

H

help 390

home-gateway

398

hostname

365

I

icmp 193

interface AP-Group

11

inter-wireless-gateways-secret

313

ip access-control-list

196

ip policy-list-copy

199

ip qos-list

202

381

ip telnet enable

48

ip telnet-client

49

ip-fragments-in

197

ip-option-in

198

ip-protocol

199

ip-rule 203

ip-simulate

204

L

lap

104

lap-location

106

lap-template

106

lb-adj-ap-time-difference

107

lb-mode 108

lb-tx-time

109

long-retry-limit

110

M

mac-address-authorized-list

69

mac-address-authorized-list-default

70

max-rx-lifetime 112

max-tx-msdu-lifetime

113

multicast-tx-rate

114

N

name 206

nvram initialize

366

O

operational mode 116

owner

207

P

policy-user-group 399

power-up-lap

117

pre-classification

208

prompt-length 390

R

radio-card-802.11

119

radio-card-template

120

reboot-lap

121

reset powerinline

367

restore-lap-to-template 122

restore-to-factory-default

123

retstatus 391

rmon alarm

150

rmon event 151

rmon history 152

rogue-ap 124

382 rogue-ap-authorized-mac-list

125

rogue-ap-interval

126

rts-threshold

128

S

security-mode 314 ,

351

set allowed managers

38

set allowed managers ip 39

set arp-aging-interval

71

set arp-tx-interval 72

set bups power

368

set dot1x max-req

315

set dot1x quiet-period

315

set dot1x re-authperiod

316

set dot1x server-timeout 317

set dot1x supp-timeout

317

set dot1x system-auth-control disable

318

set dot1x system-auth-control enable

318

set dot1x tx-period

319

set inband vlan

40

set intelligent-multicast

55

set intelligent-multicast client-port-pruning time

56

set intelligent-multicast group-filtering-delay time

57

set intelligent-multicast router-port-pruning time

58

set interface inband 40

set interface ppp enable/disable/off/reset

42

set intermodule port redundancy

251

set ip route

62

set license

368

set logging file

156

set logging file condition

154

set logging server 157

set logging server access-level

158

set logging server condition 159

set logging server disable

161

set logging server enable

161

set logging server facility

162

set logging session disable 165

set logging session enable

165

set logout 391

set mac-aging

72

set mac-aging-time

73

set port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-advertise-

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

ment

253

set port channel 254

set port classification 255

set port disable

256

set port dot1x initialize

257

set port dot1x max-req

258

set port dot1x port-control 259

set port dot1x quiet-period 260

set port dot1x re-authenticate 261

set port dot1x re-authentication 262

set port dot1x re-authperiod 263

set port dot1x server-timeout

264

set port dot1x supp-timeout 265

set port dot1x tx-period

266

set port duplex

267

set port enable 269

set port flowcontrol

270

set port level

272

set port mirror

273

set port name

274

set port negotiation 275

set port point-to-point admin status

276

set port powerinline priority

278

set port redundancy

279 set port redundancy {enable | disable} 279

set port spantree cost

282

set port spantree disable 283

set port spantree enable

284

set port spantree force-protocol-migration

284

set port spantree priority

285

set port speed 286

set port static-vlan

287

set port trap

288

set port vlan

289

set port vlan-binding-mode

290

set ppp authentication incoming

43

set ppp baud-rate

43

set ppp chap-secret

44

set ppp incoming timeout

45

set queuing scheme 369

set radius authentication 400

set radius authentication retry-time

401

set radius authentication secret 402

set radius authentication server

403

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide set radius authentication udp-port

404

set radius secret

404

set snmp community

326

set snmp retries 327

set snmp timeout

328

set snmp trap

328

set snmp trap auth

330

set spantree disable

336

set spantree enable

337

set spantree hello-time

339

set spantree max-age

340

set spantree priority

341

set spantree tx-hold-count

342 set spantree version 342

set system contact 370

set system location

370

set system name

371

set terminal recovery password 392

set time client

372

set time protocol

373

set time server

374

set timezone

374

set trunk 291

set utilization cpu

166

set vlan 74

short-retry-limit

130

short-slot-time-implemented

131

short-slot-time-status 132

show

405

show allowed managers status

46 show allowed managers table 46

show arp-aging-interval

75

show arp-tx-interval

75

show boot bank

376

show bups power 377

show cam

76

show dev log file

167

show dot1x

319

show dot1x statistics

320

show download status

377

show dscp-table 209

show ether-type-rule 210

show image version 378

show intelligent-multicast hardware-support

60

383

show intermodule port redundancy 292

show ip access-control-list 211

show ip active-policy-lists 212

show ip qos-list 214

show ip route

64

show ip-rule

215

show l2-module-config 77

show l2-stack-config

81

show lap parameters

133

show license 378

show list

216

show logging file condition

168

show logging file content

169

show logging server condition 171

show logging session condition

171

show logout 167 ,

393

show mac address authorized list

82

show mac-aging

83

show mac-aging-time

84

show module identity 380

show port

292

show port auto-negotiation-flowcontrol-advertisement

294

show port channel 295

show port classification

296

show port dot1x

297

show port dot1x statistics

300

show port edge state

301

show port flowcontrol

302

show port mirror

304

show port point-to-point status

305

show port redundancy

306

show port trap

307

show port vlan-binding-mode

308

show ppp authentication

51

show ppp baud-rate

51

show ppp configuration

52

show ppp incoming timeout

52

show ppp session

53

show queuing scheme

382

show radius authentication

405

show rmon alarm

172

show rmon event

173

show rmon history

174

384 show rmon statistics

175

show rogue ap authorized mac list 135

show secure current

53

show snmp retries

332

show snmp timeout 333

show spantree 343

show ssid 352

show system 383

show template parameters

135

show tftp download software status

383

show time

384

show time parameters

385 show timezone 385

show trunk

309

show upload status

36

show user group table

406

show username

407

show vlan

84

show web aux-files-url

386

show-ap-group

12

show-policy-statistics 217

source-ip 219

source-user-group

220

spectralink-compatible-phone

137

ssid

138 ,

354

ssid2lap

355

sync time

387

T

tcp destination-port

221

tcp-established

223

tcp-source-port 224

tech

387

terminal 394

traffic-type 226

tree 387

tx-power-level

139

U

udp destination-port

227

udp source-port 230

unicast-tx-rate

140

user-group 409

username 411

V

vlan 356 ,

412

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

W

wep-encryption-key-effective

321 ,

358

wep-keys-format 322

wireless-domain-secret

417

wireless-domain-servers

416

Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide 385

386 Avaya W310 Command Reference Guide

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project